Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

11th Computer Science Guide Iteration and Recursion Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer :

Question 1.
A loop invariant need not be true.
a) at the start of the loop
b) at the start of each iteration
c) at the end of each iteration
d) at the start of the algorithm
Answer:
d) at the start of the algorithm

Question 2.
We wish to cover a chessboard with dominoes, I I 1 the number of black squares andSamacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 1 the number of white squares covered by dominoes, respectively, placing a domino can be modeled by
a) b ; = b + 2
b) w := w + 2
c) b, w : = b + 1, w + 1
d) b : = w
Answer:
d) b : = w

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 3.
If m x a + n x b is an invariant for the assignment a, b : -a + 8, b + 7, the values of m and n are
a) m = 8, n = 7
b) m – 1, n = -8
c) m = 7, n = 8
d) m – 8, n = -7
Answer:
b) m – 1, n = -8

Question 4.
Which of the following is not an invariant of the assignment? m, n ; = m + 2, n + 3.
a) m mod 2
b) n mod 3
c) 3 x m – 2 x n
d) 2 x m – 3 x n
Answer:
d) 2 x m – 3 x n

Question 5.
If Fibonacci number is defined recursively as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 2
to evaluate F(4), how many times F( ) is applied?
a) 3
b) 4
c) 8
d) 9
Answer:
a) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 6.
Using this recursive definition
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 3
how many multiplications are needed to calculate a10?
a) 11
b) 10
c) 9
d) 8
Answer:
c) 9

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an invariant?
Answer:
An expression involving variables, which remain unchanged by an assignment to one of these variables is called an invariant of the assignment.

Question 2.
Define a loop invariant.
Answer:
Each time the loop body is executed, the variables which remains unchanged by the execution of the loop body is called the loop invariant.

Question 3.
Does testing the loop condition affect the loop invariant? Why?
Answer:
No, the loop condition does not affect the loop invariant. Because the loop invariant is true at four points.

  1. At the start of the loop.
  2. At the start of each iteration.
  3. At the end of each iteration.
  4. At the end of the loop.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 4.
What is the relationship between loop invariant, loop condition, and the input-output recursively?
Answer:

  • Establish the loop invariant at the start of the loop.
  • The loop body should so update the variables as to progress toward the end and maintain the loop invariant, at the same time.
  • When the loop ends, the termination condition and the loop invariant should establish the input-output relation.

Question 5.
What is recursive problem-solving?
Answer:
Recursion is a method of solving problems that involves breaking a problem down into smaller and smaller subproblems until the user gets into a small problem that can be solved trivially. Usually, recursion involves a function calling itself. While it may not seem like much on the surface, recursion allows us to write elegant solutions to problems that may otherwise be very difficult to program.

Question 6.
Define factorial of a natural number recursively.
Answer:
factoriai(n)
— inputs: n
— outputs: f
if n = 0
f = 1
else
f = n x factorial(n -1) → Recursive process
Example:
To calculate 5 factorial factorial(5)
= 5 x factorial(4)
= 5 x 4 x factorial(3)
= 5 x 4 x 3 x factorial(2)
= 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x factorial (1) =5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 = 120

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
There are 7 tumblers on a table, all standing upside down. You are allowed to turn any 2 tumblers simultaneously in one move. Is it possible to reach a situation when all the tumblers are right side up? (Hint: The parity of the number of upside-down tumblers is invariant).
Solution:
Let u – No. of tumblers right side up
v – No. of tumblers upside down
Initial stage : u = 0, v = 7 (All tumblers upside down)
Final stage output: u = 7, v = 0 (All tumblers right side up)

Possible Iterations:
(i) Turning both up side down tumblers to right side up
u = u + 2, v = v – 2 [u is even]

(ii) Turning both right side up tumblers to upside down.
u = u – 2, v = v + 2 [u is even]

(iii) Turning one right side up tumblers to upside down and other tumblers from upside down to right side up.
u = u + 1 – 1 = u, v = v + 1 – 1 = v [u is even]

Initially u = 0 and continues to be even in all three cases. Therefore u is always even. Invariant: u is even (i. e. No. of right side up tumblers are always even)
But in the final stage (Goal), u = 7 and v = 0 i. e. u is odd.
Therefore it is not possible to reach a situation where all the tumblers are right side up.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 2.
A knockout tournament is a series of games. Two players compete in each game; the loser is knocked out (i.e. does not play anymore), the winner carries on. The winner of the tournament is the player that is left after all other players have been knocked out. Suppose there are 1234 players in a tournament. How many games are played before the tournament winner is decided?
Solution :
Suppose there are 2 players A and B competing in a knockout match, so the number of possible matches is – A Vs B
The answer is Only One.
Suppose there are 3 players A, B and C competing in a knockout match, so the Number of possible matches is – 2.
A Vs B , and A/B( Whoever wins with plays with C) vs C.
Suppose there are 4 players A, B, C & D competing in a knockout match, so the Number of possible matches is – 3.
A Vs B , C Vs D A/B Vs C/D
Thus the General Observations is –
When there are 2 players – 1 Match
When there are 3 players – 2 Matches
When there are 4 players – 3 Matches
When there are n players – ( n – 1) Matches
Hence when there are 1234 players there will be 1233 matches.
The number of games in a single-elimination tournament is always 1 less than the number of players/teams.

Question 3.
King Vikramaditya has two magic swords. With one, he can cut off 19 heads of a dragon, but after that, the dragon grows 13 heads. With the other sword, he can cut off 7 heads, but 22 new heads grow. If all heads are cut off, the dragon dies. If the dragon has originally 1000 heads, can it ever die? (Hint: The number of heads mod 3 is invariant.)
Answer:
No. of heads of dragon = 1000
sword 1: cuts 19 heads but 13 heads grow back.
sword 2: cuts 7 heads but 22 heads grow back.
Let n be the number of heads of the dragon at the initial state.

Case 1: King uses Sword 1
Sword 1 cuts off 19 heads but 13 heads grow back.
n : = n – 19 + 13 = n – 6 No. of heads are reduced by 6.

Case 2: King uses Sword 2
Sword 2 cuts 7 heads but 22 heads grow back.
n : = n – 7 + 22 = n + 15
No. of heads are increased by 15.

Note:
In the above two cases, either 6 heads are removed or 15 heads added. Both 6 and 15 are multiples of 3.
Therefore repeating case 1 and case 2 recursively will either reduce or increase dragon heads in multiples of 3.
That is invariant is n mod 3.
If n mod 3 = 0 then there is a possibility that the dragon dies.
But 1000 is not a multiple of 3 1000 mod 3 = 1 ≠ 0
It is not possible to kill the dragon. The dragon never dies.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Assume an 8 x 8 chessboard with the usual coloring. “Recoloring” operation changes the color of all squares of a row or a column. You can recolor repeatedly. The goal is to attain just one black square. Show that you cannot achieve the goal. (Hint: If a row or column has b black squares, it changes by (|8 – b) – b |).
Solution:
Let us start with a normal coloured chessboard, with a number of black squares B=32 and the number of white squares W=32.
So W – B = 0, which is divisible by 4 and W + B = 64.
W-B = 0 mod 4

Whenever we change the colours of a row or column, we change the colour of 8 squares. Let this row (or column) have w white squares + b black squares w + b = 8 squares.

If this operation B increases (or decreases) by 2n, then W decreases (or increases) by 2n so that W + B = 64, but B – W will change by 4n and it will remain divisible by 4.
W – B = 0 mod 4

After every operation, “B – W mod 4” can have no other values.
But the required state has 63 white squares and 1 black square, so it requires
W-B = 63-1 = 62 = 2 mod 4 which is impossible.

Question 2.
Power can also be defined recursively as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 4
Construct a recursive algorithm using this definition. How many multiplications are needed to calculate a10?
Recursive Algorithm
power(a,n)
— inputs: n is an integer, n ≥ 0
— outputs: an
if n = 0 → Base case
1
else
if(n%2 = 0)
a x power(a, an-1) → Recursion step for odd number else
a x power(an/2 x an/2) → → Recursion step for even number

To calculate a10
power(a, 10)
= a x power(a5 x a5)
= a x power(a, a4) x power(a, a4)
= a x a x power(a2 x a2) x power(a, a4)
= a x a x a x power(a, a0) x power(a, a0 ) x
power(a, a4)
= a x a x a x a x a x power(a2 x a2)
= a x a x a x a x a x a x a x power(a, a0) x a x power(a, a0)
=a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a
There are nine multiplications are needed.

Question 3.
A single-square-covered board is a board of 2n x 2n squares in which one square is covered with a single square tile. Show that it is possible to cover this board with triominoes without overlap.
Solution :
A triamine is an L-shaped tile formed with three adjacent squares.
Corner-covered board and triamine
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 5 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Cover the corner-covered board with the L-shaped triominoes without overlap, Triominoes can be rotated as needed.
The size of the problem is n (board of size 2n x 2n). We can solve the problem by recursion. The base case is n = 1. It is a 2 x 2 corner-covered board. We can cover it with one triamine and solve the problem.

In the recursion step, divide the corner-covered board of size 2n x 2n into 4 sub-boards, each of size 2n-1 x 2n-1, by drawing horizontal and vertical lines through the center of the board. Place a triamine at the center of the entire board so as to not cover the corner-covered sub-board, as shown in the left-most board of the given figure below. Now, we have four corner-covered boards, each of size 2n-1 x 2n-1.
Recursive process of covering a corner-covered board of size 2 x 23
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 8

We have 4 sub-problems whose size is strictly smaller than the size of the given problem. We can solve each of the sub-problems recursively. tile corner_covered board of size n
if n = 1 — base case
cover the 3 squares with one triominoe
else — recursion step
divide board into 4 sub_boards of size n – 1
place a triominoe at centre of the board
leaving out the corner_covered sub-board
tile each sub-board of size n-1

The resulting recursive process for covering a 23 x 23 corner-covered board is illustrated in the above Figure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

11th Computer Science Guide Iteration and Recursion Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
………………… is an algorithm design technique, closely related to induction.
(a) Iteration
(b) Invariant
(c) Loop invariant
(d) Recursion
Answer:
(d) Recursion

Question 2.
Each time the loop body is executed, the variables are _________
a) updated
b) unchanged
c) neither A nor B
d) destroyed
Answer:
a) updated

Question 3.
In a loop, if L is an invariant of the loop body B, then L is known as a …………………
(a) recursion
(b) variant
(c) loop invariant
(d) algorithm
Answer:
(c) loop invariant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 4.
_________ is more powerful than the iteration.
a) Recursion
b) Specification
c) Composition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Recursion

Question 5.
The unchanged variables of the loop body are…………………
(a) loop invariant
(b) loop variant
(c) condition
(d) loop variable
Answer:
(a) loop invariant

Question 6.
_________ is a recursive solver case.
a) Base case
b) Recursion steps
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 7.
If L is a loop variant, then it should be true at ………………… important points in the algorithm.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 8.
In_________, the size of moot to a sub-problem must be strictly smaller than the size of the given input.
a) Recursion
b) Specification
c) Composition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Recursion

Question 9.
In an expression, if the variables have the same value before and after an assignment, then it is of an assignment.
(a) variant
(b) Invariant
(c) iteration
(d) variable
Answer:
(b) Invariant

Question 10.
An expression involving variables, which remains unchanged by an assignment to one of these variables, is called _________ of the assignment.
a) an invariant
b) variant
c) neither A nor B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) an invariant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 11.
When the solver calls a sub solver, then it is called …………………
(a) Iterative call
(b) solver call
(c) recursive call
(d) conditional call
Answer:
(c) recursive call

Question 12.
_________ Is an algorithm design technique
to execute the same action repeatedly.
a) iteration
b) recursion
c) Both iteration and recursion
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both iteration and recursion

Question 13.
Which of the following is updated when each time the loop body is executed?
(a) data type
(b) subprogram
(c) function
(d) variable
Answer:
(d) variable

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 14.
Recursion is an algorithm design technique, closely related to _________
a) induction
b) introduction
c) intuition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) induction

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
When the loop variant will be true?
Answer:
The loop invariant is true before the loop body and after the loop body, each time.

Question 2.
How problems are solved using recursion?
Answer:
Using recursion, we solve a problem with a given input, by solving the same problem with a part of the input and constructing a solution to the original problem from the solution to the partial input.

Question 3.
If L is a loop variant, then where it is true in the algorithm?
Answer:
It is true in the following four points of an algorithm.

  1. at the start of the loop.
  2. at the start of each iteration.
  3. at the end of each iteration.
  4. at the end of the loop.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Write a note on Recursion.
Answer:
Recursion:
Recursion is another algorithm design technique, closely related to iteration, but more powerful. Using recursion, we solve a problem with a given input, by solving the same problem with a part of the input and constructing a solution to the original problem from the solution to the partial input.

Question 2.
Write the recursive algorithm for the length of a sequence.
Answer:
The recursive algorithm for the length of a sequence
can be written as
length (s)
— inputs: s
— outputs : length of s
if s has one customer — base case
1
else
1 + length(tail(s)) — recursion step.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain loop Invariant in detail.
Answer:
In a loop, if L is an invariant of the loop body B, then L is known as a loop invariant,
while C
— L
B
— L
The loop invariant is true before the loop body and after the loop body, each time. Since L is true at the start of the first iteration, L is true

at the start of the loop also (just before the loop). Since L Is true at the end of the last iteration, L is true when the loop ends also (just after the loop). Thus, if L is a loop variant, then it is true at four important points in the algorithm, as annotated in the algorithm and shown in Figure 3.1.

i) at the start of the loop (just before the loop)
ii) at the start of each iteration (before loop body)
iii) at the end of each iteration (after loop body)
iv) at the end of the loop (just after the loop)

i) — L, start of loop
while
C

ii) — L, start of iteration
B

iii) –L, end of Iteration

iv) — L, end of loop

The points where the loop invariant is true
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 9

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 2.
Design an iterative algorithm to compute an.
Answer:
Let us name the algorithm power(a, n).
For example,
power(10, 4) = 10000
power (5,3) = 125 .
power (2,5) = 32
Algorithm power(a, n) computes an by multiplying a cumulatively n times.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 10
The specification and the loop invariant are shown as comments.

power (a, n)
— inputs: n is a positive integer
— outputs: p = an
p, i := 1,0
while i ≠ n
— loop invariant: p = ai
p, i: = p x a, i + 1
The step by step execution of power (2, 5) is shown in the following Table
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 3.
Explain the outline of the recursive problem-solving technique.
Answer:
The outline of the recursive problem-solving technique is shown below.

solver (input)
if the input is small enough
construct solution
else
find sub_problems of reduced input
solutions to sub_problems = solver for each sub_problem
construct a solution to the problem from
solutions to the sub_problems

Whenever we solve a problem using recursion, we have to ensure these two cases: In the recursion step, the size of the input to the recursive call is strictly smaller than the size of the given input, and there is at least one base case.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

11th Bio Botany Guide Taxonomy and Systematic BotanyText Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – A

Choose the right answer:

Question 1.
Specimen derived from non-original collection serves as the nominclatural type, when original specimen is missing it is known as
a) Holotype
b) Neotype
c) Isotype
d) Paratype
Answer:
b) Neotype

Question 2.
Phylogenilic classification is the most favoured classification because it reflects,
a) Comparative anatomy
b) Number of flowers produced
c) Comparative cytology
d) Evolutionary relationships
Answer:
d) Evolutionary relationships

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
The taxonomy which involves the similarities and dissimilarities among the immune system of different taxa is termed as
a) Chemotaxonomy
b) Molecular systematics
c) Sero taxonomy
d) Numerical taxonomy
Answer:
c) Sero taxonomy

Question 4.
Which of the following is not a flowering plant with root nodules containing filamentous nitrogen-fixing micro-organisms?
a) Crotalaria juncea
b) Cycas revoluta
c) Cice rarietinum
d) Casuarina equisetifolia
Answer:
b) Cycas revoluta

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 5.
Flowers are weakly zygomorphic in
a) Cerapegia
b) Thevelia
c) Datura
d) Solanum
Answer:
c) Datura

Two marks

Question 1.
What is the role of national gardens in conserving biodiversity
Answer:
Botanical Gardens play the following important roles.

  1. Gardens with an aesthetic value attract a large number of visitors. For example, the Great Banyan Tree (Ficus benghalensis) in the Indian Botanical Garden at Kolkata
  2. Gardens have a wide range of species and supply taxonomic material for botanical research.
  3. Garden is used for self-instruction or demonstration purposes.

Question 2.
Where will you place the plants which contain two cotyledons with cup-shaped thalamus
Answer:

  1. Two cotyledonous plants are kept under Dicotyledonou
  2. Cup-shaped thalamus is a unique feature of the series Thalamiflorae of subclass

Polypetalae:

  • Class
  • Dicot
  • Subclass
  • Polypetalae
  • Series
  • Thalamiflorae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
How do molecular markers work to unlock the evolutionary history of organisms?
Answer:
Molecular taxonomy using molecular markers like RAPD’s etc helps in establishing the relationship between the members of different taxonomic groups at the DNA level. Thus it helps to unlock the evolutionary history of organisms.

Question 4.
Give the F.D of Clutoria ternalia
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 1
Question 5.
How will you distinguish Solanaceae members from Liliaceae members.
Answer:

JSolanaceae (Dicot) Morphology

Liliaceae (Monocot) Morphology

Bulbous stem / rhizome / corm absent but stem tuber present eg. Solarium tuberosumBulbous Stem – Lilium
Rhizome -Polygonatum
Corm – Colchicum Occur
Radical leaves Cariscup } Absent from rootsRadical leaves present eg. Lilium
Leaves alternate & exstipulateSlipules absent exstipulate fleshy and hollow
Flowers – PentamerousFlowers – Trimerous
Calyx_ – Persistent -Solanum melongenaCalyx , Corolla – Absent
Corolla of various shapes presentPerranth is only present
Stamens – 5 – EpipetalousStamens – 6 – In a whorl of three each apostamenous
Carpels:

  1. Ovary superior
  2. bicarpellary, bilocular

Carpels oblipuely placed bicarpellary later become tetra carpellary due to the formation of false septa

Ovary superior tricarpellary trilocular
Fruits – Berry / capsuleFruits – Loculierdal capsula
Anatomy:
Bi-collateral Vascular Bundles occur
Cambium present Secondary growth present
Anatomy:
Conjoint collateral Vascular bundles
Cambium absent
No secondary growth

Part – B

11th Bio Botany Guide Taxonomy and Systematic Botany Additional Important Questions and Answers

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Who is called the father of Botany?
(a) Linnaeus
(b) Theophrastus
(c) Darwin
(d) Thales
Answer:
(b) Theophrastus

Question 2.
The latest ICBN was held at
a) Cambridge – England
b) Leningrad – Russia
c) Shenzhen – China
d) Rio-de genero – America
Answer:
cl Shenzhen China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Who proposed the concept of “idos” or species?
(a) Theophrastus
(b) Stebbins
(c) Darwin
(d) Plato
Answer:
(d) Plato

Question 4.
The floral of Tamil Nadu Carnatic by K.M. Mathew (1983) and Flora of Madras Presidency by J.S Gamble and Fischer belong to
a) Monograph
b) Catalogue
c) Flora
d) Regional flora
Answer:
d) Regional flora

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 5.
Who first proposed the early elementary rule of naming plants?
(a) A.P.de Candolle
(b) Linnaeus
(c) Alphonse de Candolle
(d) Simpson
Answer:
(b) Linnaeus

Question 6.
Botanical Garden of New South Wales is located at
a) Brazil
b) New York
c) Sydney
d) Rio de Janeiro
Answer:
c) Sydney

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 7.
18th International Botanical congress was held at …………….
(a) Sydney
(b) Leningrad
(c) Melbourne
(d) London
Answer:
(c) Melbourne

Question 8.
Plants with incomplete flowers either a petalous or with undifferentiated calyx and corolla are placed under the sub class
a) Heterornerae
b) Monochlarnydeae
c) Bicarpellatae
d) Monocotyledonae
Answer:
b) Monochlamvdeae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Adolph Engler and Karl – A – Prantl are
a) Americal taxonomists
b) French taxonomists
c) Chinese taxonomists
d) German taxonomists
Answer:
d) German taxonomists

Question 10.
…………… is a descriptive phrase of a plant.
(a) Vernacular name
(b) Binomial
(c) Polynomial
(d) Botanical name
Answer:
(c) Polynomial

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
The fruit is geocarpic in
a) Vigna radiate
b) Cablab purpuris
c) Araehis hypogea
d) Cicer arietinum
Answer:
c) Arachis hypogea

Question 12.
The term biosystematics was introduced by
a) Chrispeels and Gartner
b) Camp and Gilly
c) Engler and Prantl
d) Bentham and Hooker
Answer:
b) Camp and Gilly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
…………… are the tools for identifying unfamiliar plants.
(a) Flora
(b) Keys
(c) Monograph
(d) Catalogues
Answer:
(b) Keys

Question 14.
Most of the seeds are reniform in
a) Fabaceae
b) Solanaceae
c) Asteraceae
d) Liliaceae
Answer:
a) Fabaceae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 15.
Plants with incomplete flowers either petalous or with undifferentiated calyx and corolla are placed under
a) Monocotyledonae
b) Polypetalae
c) Monochlamydeae
d) Gamopetalae
Answer:
c) Monochlamydeae

Question 16.
First modern botanical garden was established by …………… .
(a) Theophrastus
(b) Linnaeus
(c) Luca Ghini
(d) Stebbins
Answer:
(c) Luca Ghini

Question 17.
Phenology is the study
a) Pollen grains structure
b) Development of gametes
c) Study of climate and weather on plants
d) Study of functional aspects of plants
Answer:
c) Study of climate and weather on plants

Question 18
Tephrosia purpurea, Indigofera tinctoria are plants used as
a) Biofuel or bioenergy
b) Bio manure
c) Biomedicine
d) Biopesticides
Answer:
b) Bio manure.

Question 19.
Carpels are obliquely placed in the family
a) Fabaceae
b) Solanaceae
C) Liliaceae
d) Malvaceae
Answer:
b) Solanaceae

Question 20.
Which series includes epigynous flowers with an inferior ovary?
(a) Heteromerae
(b) Disaflorea
(c) Inferae
(d) Thalanifloreae
Answer:
(c) Inferae

II. Fill up the blanks in the given Tabulation

Question 1.
Name of the Taxonomist BOOK No. of plants

Name of the Taxonomist

BOOK

No. of plants

i. Theophrastus (372 – 287 BC)De Historia Pfcntarum………………….
ii. ……………….Materia Medica600 plants
iii. Carolus LinnaeusSpecies Plantarum………….
iv. ………………3 volumes of Genera Plantarum97205 species (202 families)

Answer:
i. 500 Plants
ii. Discoredes (62 – 127 AD)
iii. 7300 Species
iv. Bentham & Hooker

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.

Taxon

Definition

Example

i. FamilyComprises a no of genera which share some similarities…………………..
ii. …………………Group of families shows fewer similarities among themselvesMalvales
iii. ClassGroup of order which share few similarities…………………..
iv. ………………….Number of classesMagnoliophyta

Answer:
(i) Asteraceae
(ii) order
(iii) Asteropsida
(iv) Sub – Division

Question 3.

Name of the IBC

Place

Year

i. 5th International Botanical Congress………………………..1930
ii. 12th International Botanical CongressLeningrad – Russia…………………..
iii. 18th International Botanical Congress……………………..2011
iv. …………………Shenzhen – China2017

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 2

Answer:
b) Cambridge – England 1975 Melbourne Australia 19th I BC

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

III. Find out the correct statement.

Question 1.
Find out the Correct Statements the given below.
a) Scientific Names are treated as Latin regardless of their derivation
b) Cryptogams include non-flowering plants
c) Linnaeus system of classification is known as the Natural system of classification
d) According to APG IV Monocots contain 10 orders and 37 families
(I) a & b
(II) b & c
(III) c & d
(IV) a & d
Answer:
(I) a & b

Question 2.
Find out the correct statements from the given below
a) Botanical name of chilly – Capsicum esculentum
b) Ashwagandha is also known as Amukkura
c) An alkaloid colchicine is got from Colchicum luteum
d) Glycine max is the botanical name of the Soya bean
(I) a & b
(II) b & d
(III) a & c
(IV) c & d
Answer:
(II) b & d

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

IV. Assertion and reason

Question 1.
Assertion: Classification is essential in biology because there is a vast diversity of organisms to sort out and compare
Reason: Unless they are organized into manageable Categories, It will be difficult for the identification
(A) Assertion and Reason correct. The reason is explaining Assertion
(B) Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason not explaining Assertion
(C) Assertion is true, but Reason is wrong
(D) Assertion is true, but Reason is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
a – Assertion and Reason correct. Reason is explaining Assertion

Question 2.
Assertion: Cronquist system of classification could not persist for a long time.
Reason: The system is not very useful for identification and cannot be adopted in herbaria.
Answer:
d) Assertion ‘A’ is true Reason ‘R’ is not explaining Assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Assertion : Monograph is a complete global account of a faxon of any rank family genus or species at a given time
Reason : It has books of libraries rich in botanical litles.
Answer:
d) Assertion correct but Reason not explaining Assertion

Question 4.
Assertion A: Chemotaxonomy is the scientific approach to the classification of plants on the basis of their biochemical constituents
Reason R: Proteins, amino acids, nucleic acids, and peptides, etc are the most studied chemicals in chemotaxonomy
Answer:
a) Assertion and Reason ‘R’ correct Reason is explaining Assertion

V. Match the following and find the correct

Question 1
Name of Herbarium No. of specimens
i) Presidency college Herbarium – Chennai – A. 4,08,776
ii) Central National Herbarium – Calcutta – B. 30,500
iii) Madras Herbarium – Coimbatore – C. 15,000
iv) Jawaharlal Nehru Tropical Botanical Garden – D. 2,00,000
and Reserach Institute Trivandrum
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 3
Answer:
a) C D A B

Question 2.
Botanical Name Common Name
(I) Glycirrhiza glabra A. Thanneer Muttan
(II) Withania somnifera B. Athimaduram
(III) Asperagus racemosus C. Senkandal
(IV) Gloriosa superba D. Amukkara
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 4
Answer:
a) B D A C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

VI. Choose the wrong answer

Question 1.
(i) Karyology – Study of Chromosomes
(ii) Palynology – Study of Pollen
(iii) Serology – Study of Antibiotics
(iv) Paleology – Study of Fossils
Answer:
(iii) – Serology study of antibiotics

Question 2.
Type Example
(i) Tree – Solanum violceum
(ii) Prickles on the Body of the plant – Solanum xantho carpum
(iii) Vines – Lycium sinensis
(iv) Herb – Solanum nigrum
Answer:
(II) prickles on the body of the plant – body Solanum xantho carpum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Botanical Garden Major Attraction
(i) Nation Botanical Garden Lucknow – Germplasm collection & exsitu conversation
(ii) JNTBGRI Trivandrum (Kerala) – Bambusetum
(iii) National orchidarium Yercaud – Fernery
(iv) Indian Botanical Garden Kolkata – The great Banyan tree
Answer:
(iii) National orchidarium Yercard – Fernery

Question 4.
Choose the right answer :
(i) Plants having Dome-shaped thalamus – Gamopetalae
(ii) Plants having Cup-shaped thalamus – Calyciflorae
(iii) Plants having epigynous flowers – Thalamiflorae
(iv) Plants with united petals & sepals – Inferae
Answer:
(ii) Plants having cup-shaped thalamus Calyciflorae

VII. Match correctly & give the correct answer

Question 1.
(i) Systema Naturae -A. 1862-63
(ii) Philosophia botanica -B.1753
(iii) Species plantarum -C. 1735
(iv) General plantarum -D.1737
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 5
Answer:
c) C – D – B – A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
(i) Library of British Museum – A. Revision
(ii) Malvaceae of India by T.K. Paul – B. Catalogue
(iii) Family of Lentibulariaceae
by M.K. Janarthanam & Henry – C. Botanical Garden Lucknow
(iv) 500 species of rose hybrids – D. Monograph
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 6
Answer:
a) B A D C

Question 3.
Botanical Name – Common Name
(i) Butea Frondosa – A. Rose Wood
(ii) Sesbania grandiflora – B. Garden pea
(iii) Dalbergia latefolia – C. Flame of the forest
(iv) Pisum sativum – D. Agathe
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 7
Answer:
b) C D A B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Common name Botanical name
(i) Rose wood – A. Pterocarpus dalbergioides
(ii) Red Sandal wood – B. Dalbergia latifolia
(iii) Padauk – C. Pterocarpus marsupium
(iv) Vengai – D. Pterocarpus santalinus
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 8
Answer:
c) B D A C

VIII. Find out the true and false statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer:

Question 1.
(i) The evolution & classification of flowering plants – Arthur cronquist
(ii) Origin of species – Engler & prantl
(iii) Philosophia botanica – Linnaeus
(iv) Theorie elementaire de-botanique – A.P. de. Candolle
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 9
Answer:
a) True False True True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Find out the True and False statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer:
(i) Documents of all plant species in a given geographical area is known as – Monograph
(ii) These are often descriptive & poetic references to plants – Vernacular name
(iii) A complete global account of a taxon of any rank – Flora
(iv) Tools of Identification implemented by Computer – Polyclave key
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 10
Answer:
b) False True False True

Two marks

Question 1.
Define Taxonomy.
Answer:
Taxonomy is “the science dealing with the study of classification including the bases, principles, rules and procedures”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
What are the characteristics of a species
Answer:

  • Population of organism closely resemble each other
  • Descend from common ancestor
  • They sexually interbreed freely producing fertile offspring
  • They have morphological resemblance in asexually reproducing organism
  • In fossil organisms they are identified by their morphological & anatomical resemblance

Question 3.
Which is the lowest taxon in classification? Define.
Answer:
Species is the lowest taxon in classification. It is defined as the group of individuals which are closely resembling each other and interbreed among themselves producing fertile offspring.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Define Binomial Nomenclature.
Answer:

  • Introduced by Gaspard Barhin
  • Implemented by Carolus Linnaeus
  • Scientific name of a plant consists of 2 words.
  • First one is Genus name
  • Second one is Species name.
  • Genus Species

Eg: Mangifera – Genus – indica – Species

Question 5.
What are vernacular names? Give an example.
Answer:
Vernacular names are known as common names. Example: Albizia Amara L. is called as Usilai in South Tamil Nadu and Thurinji in North Tamil Nadu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 6.
Biosystematics Define & Give its objectives.
Answer:
Definition:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 11

Question 7.
What is the importance of serotaxonomy.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 12

Question 8.
When a neotype specimen is selected?
Answer:
Neotype Specimen is derived from non – original collection selected as the type when the original specimen is missing or destroyed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Define karyotaxonomy.
Answer:

  • Increased knowledge of chromosomes Have been used for extensive biosystematic studies & resolving many taxonomic problems.
  • Cytological especially chromosomal characters such as number, size, morphology and behaviour during meiosis are of taxonomic value.

Question 10.
Differentiate Regional Flora from continental flora.
Answer:
Regional Flora from continental flora.

  1. Regional Flora: Flora covering a large geographical area or a botanical region Ex: flora of Madras Presidency.
  2. Continental Flora: Flora covering the entire continent. Ex: flora of Europaea.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
Write down the Aims of Chemotaxonomy.
Answer:

  • To develop taxonomic characters to improve, the existing system of plant classification
  • To improve the present-day knowledge of phylogeny o plants.

Question 12.
Define Biosystematics
Answer:

  • Introduced by Camp and Gilly in 1943
  • It is an experimental, ecological cyto taxonomy through which life forms studied and their relationships defined

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
How Cronquist classified the angiosperms?
Answer:
Cronquist classified the angiosperms into two main classes Magnoliopsida and Liliopsida.

Question 14.
Why do we say that the development of fruit in Arachis hypogea is geocarpic?
Answer:

  • In Arachis hypogea after fartilization, the stipe of ovary become meristematic and grows down into the soil.
  • The ovary gets buried into the soil and so we call the fmit as groundnut.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 15.
Distinguish between Stipule, Stipel and Pulvinus in the leaf of Fabaceae.
Answer:

Stipule

Stipel

Pulvinus

The compound leaf has a stipule a green scale like structure from which the leaf originateIt is a small scaly structure at the base of the leaflet of compound leafThe R achis and petcole of the leaf, and leaf lets have swollen, this condition is known as Pulvinus

Question 16.
Draw the structure of Papilionaceous Carolla of Fabacoae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 13

Question 17.
Differentiate between Phylloclade & Cladodo of Liliaceae.
Answer:

Phylloclade

Cladodo

(aerial sterm or branch modification)

Eg. Ruscus

Branch is modified . leaves reduced to scales

(aerial sterm modification)

Eg Asparagus

Aerial sterm is modified, leaves reduced to scales

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 18.
Point out the aims of chemotaxonomy.
Answer:
The aims of chemotaxonomy:

  1. To develop taxonomic characters which may improve the existing system of plant classification.
  2. To improve present-day knowledge of the phylogeny of plants.

Question 19.
What is meant by Scapigerous Inflorescence?
Answer:
Here the inflorescence axis (peduncle) arising from the ground bearing a cluster of flowers at its apex, with pedicels of equal length.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 20.
Label the given diagram
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 14
Answer:
A- Pedicil
B – Perianth
C – Epipetalous stamens
D- Ovary

Question 21.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 15
Answer:
A- Persistent calyx
B – Spiny outgrowth
C – Valves
D – Seed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 22.
Differentiate between Magnoliopsia and Liliopsida

Magnoliopsida

Liliopsida

6 subclasses5 subclasses
64 orders19 orders
318 families65 families
165,000 species50000 species

Demerits:

  • Highly Phylogenetic could not persist.
  • Not useful for identification & cannot be adopted.

Three marks

Question 1.
Compare the Gynoecium of Pisum sativum and Datura metal.
Answer:
Gynoecium of Pisum sativum:

  1. Mono Carpellary
  2. Unilocular
  3. Ovules on marginal placentation
  4. Feathery stigma

Gynoecium of Datura metal:

  1. Bicarpellary
  2. Tetralocular
  3. Ovules on axile placentation
  4. Bilobed stigma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Distinguish between Monophyletic, Paraphyletic & polyphyletic group.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 16

Question 3.
Why do we think that cladistics is of much needed and important today?
Answer:

  • Commonly used & accepted for phylogenetic classifications.
  • Produces a hypothesis about the relationship of organisms to predict the morphological characteristics of an organism.
  • Help to elucidate the mechanism of evolution.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Give the systematic position of Pea family.
Answer:

APG Classification

Bentham & Hooker’s Classifications

KingdomPlantaeKingdomPlantae
CladeAngiospermClassDicotyledonae
CladeEudicotsSub classPolypetatae
CladeRosidsSeriesCalyaflorae
OrderFabalesOrderRosales
FamilyFabaceaeFamilyFabaceae

Question 5.
Differentiate between Taxonomy & Systematics.
Answer:
Taxonomy:

  1. The discipline of classifying organisms into taxa
  2. Governs the practices of naming, describing, identifying and specimen preservation.
  3. Classification + Nomenclature = Taxonomy

Systematics:

  1. Broad field of biology that studies the diversification of species
  2. Governs the evolutionary history and phylogenetic relationship in addition to taxonomy
  3. Taxonomy + Phylogeny = Systematics

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 6.
Define Herbarium.
Answer:

  • Collection of collected, pressed and dried plant specimens preserved, then mounted on a sheet of paper is referred to as Herbarium.
  • It also refers to the Institution where many such Herbaria are preserved.
  • Eg. Royal Botanical garden Kew London.

Question 7.
Linnaeus classification is also called sexual system of classification. Why?
Answer:
Linnaeus classification is mostly based on sexual characters like number, union, length and distribution of stamens and also on carpel characters. Hence it is called sexual system of classification.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 8.
Various types of habits in Fabaceae.
Answer:

Herb

Indigofera, crotalaria

Prostrate herbsIndigofera enneaphylla
Erect herbCrotalaria verrucosa
ShrubsCajanus cajan
Small treesSesbania
Climbers Large treesClitoria sp Pongamia, Dalbergia
Woody climberMucuna
HydrophyteAeschyno mene aspera

Question 9.
Explain Androecium of Family Fabaceae
Answer:
1. Diadelphous – Stamens (9) + 1-9 Stamens united 1 free
2. Diadelphous – (5) + (5) – Stamens in 2 bundles of 5 each.
3. Monoadelphous but dimorphic – Out of 10 stamens 5 are with longer flaments longer anther 5 are with shorter Flaments and short anthers known as Dimorphic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 17

Question 10.
Tabulate various types of Inflorescence of Solanaceae
Answer:

Solitary flower

Datura stramonium

Terminal cymoseSolanum
Extra axillary Scorpioid cymo or RhipidiumSolanurn nigrurn
Helicoid cymeSolanurn tuberosum
Umbellate cymeWithania somnifera

Question 11.
Tabulate various types of petals of Solanaceae.
Answer:

5 petals – sympetalous
Rotate & tubular – Solanum
Bell-shaped – Atropa
I Infundibuliform  – Petunia
Bilipped & Zygomorphic – Schizanthus
Infundibuliform & Convolute – Datura

Question 12.
Tabulate ornamental plants from any 3 families you have studied.
Answer:

Family FabaceaeFamily  Solanaceae

Family Liliaceae

 Butea frondosa (Flame of the forest) Clitoria tematea (sangu – flower)Cestrium diumum – day Tulipa suaveolens — Tulip Jasmine)Petunia hybrida Agapanthus african  us garden petunia (African only

Five Marks

Question 1.
What is meant by Taxonomical Aids. Explain any one of it
Answer:

  • Tools aiding Taxonomical study are known as Taxonomical Aids
  • There are many types of these Aids keys, Flora, Revisions Monograph, Catalogues,
  • Herbarium and Botanical garden

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 18
Types:

  • Local Flora – Covers limited area sate, Country, City mountain, etc Eg. Flora of Thiruvannamalai District
  • Regional Flora – Include large geographical area Eg. Flora of Tamilnadu Carnatic by K.M. Mathew
  • Continental Flora – Cover entire continent Eg. Flora of Europaea by D.A. Web
  • Electronic Flora – Digital format of flora published online Eg. E Flora of China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Type Concept Explain also its types
Answer:
ICN’s second principle is that a specimen must be associated with a scientific name known as nomenclatural type (specimen, or its illustration)
Eg. Herbarium sheet: –

There are 7 types

  1.  Holotype:
    The original Protologue of the author is a definite source of identity
    Citation & submission of it is one of the criteria for valid publication of a botanical name
  2. Isotype: Duplicate of Holotypes
    • Same person on the same date with same field number
    • Reliable duplicates of holotype – to be distributed to various herbaria of various region
  3. Lectotype: Specimen selected from original material may serve as Lectotype when holotype is missing or destroyed
  4. Syntype: When the author cites more than one specimen in his Protologue without designating Holotype.
  5. Neotype: Specimen from the non-original collection when original
  6. Paratype: holotype missing or destroyed: specimen other than Holo, Iso, or Syntype
  7. Epitope: Specimen or illustration serves as an interpretive type when all the above types are ambiguous.

Question 3.
Draw the outline classification of APG IV.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Give an account of APG classification
Answer:

  • Most recent classification of flowering plants
  • Done in last decade of 20th century
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 20
  • All these provide data with respect to DNA seqences of 2 chloroplast genes (extrachromosomal) (atp B and r bcL) and one nuclear gene (nuclear ribosomal 18 s DNA).

Question 5.
Tabulate Bentham & Hooker’s system of classification
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 21

Question 6.
Define biosystematics & list out the aim of biosystematics.
Answer:
1. Biosystematics: Biosystematics is an “Experimental, ecological and cytotaxonomy” through which life forms are studied and their relationships are defined.
2. Aims of Biosystematics: The aims of biosystematics are as follows:

  • To delimit the naturally occurring biotic community of plant species.
  • To establish the evolution of a group of taxa by understanding the evolutionary and phylogenetic trends.
  • To involve any type of data gathering based on modem concepts and not only on morphology and anatomy.
  • To recognize the various groups as separate biosystematics categories such as ecotypes, ecospecies, cenospecies, and comparium.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 7.
Tabulate various International Herbarium
Answer:
International Herbarium

Herbarium

Year EstablishedAcronym

Number of specimens

1.Museum National d’Historie Naturelle, Paris, France1635P ,PC10,000,000
2. New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, New York, U.S.A1891NY72,00,000
3. Komarov Botanical Institute, St.Petersburg (Leningrad), Russia1823LE71,60,000
4. Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England, U.K1841K70,00,000

Question 8.
Write down the uses of Herbarium
Answer:

  • Provides resource material for systematic research & studies
  • A place for the orderly arrangement of voucher specimens
  • Voucher specimen serves as a reference for comparing doubtful Newly collected fresh specimen
  • Voucher specimens play a role in
    • Studies like floristic diversity
    • Environmental assessment
    • Ecological mechanisms &
    • Survey of unexplored area
  • provides an opportunity for documenting biodiversity and studies related to the field of ecology & conservation biology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Explain Chemotaxonomy
Answer:

  • Study of various chemicals available in plants help to solve the certain taxonomical problem
  • Chemotaxonomy scientific approach of classification of plants on the basis of their biochemical constituents
  • Proteins – (more controlled by genes less subjected to natural selection)
  • So used at all hierarchical level of classification starling from variety to division.
  • Other chemicals studied are – Amino acids, nucleic acids – peptides

Question 10.
Explain Engler & Prantl’s Phylogenetic system of classification
Answer:
The two German scientists published their work in a monumental work.
Die Naturechen P flangen families in 23 volumes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 22

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
Write down the significance of Molecular taxonomy
Answer:

  • Conserved molecular sequences helped to identify
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 23
  • DNA data help in – investigation of evolutionary patterns
  • DNA taxonomy – play vital role in, understanding
  • phytogeography – help in genome mapping & bio deversity Conservation
  • DNA based Molecular markers – used for designing DNA based molecular probes

Question 12.
What is DNA barcoding?
Answer:

  • A scanner like the UPC of supermarket things, – DNA barcoding is a taxonomical device to distinguish one species from another.
  • A very short genetic sequence from a standard part of a genome is used as a DNA tag or barcode to identify a plant
  • Paul Hebert proposed it and so-known as the Father of barcoding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
Significance of DNA barcoding.
Answer:

  • Helps in the identification and classification organism
  • Aids in the mapping the extend of bio-diversity
  • Eventhough it require a large data base of sequences for comparison & prior knowledge of the barcoding region, it is helpful tool to determine the authenticity of botanical material in whole, cut or powdered form.

Question 14.
Differences between Classical and Modern taxonomy.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 24
Question 15.
Give an account of Botanical description of clitoria ternatea (Sangupushpam).
Answer:
Habit – Twining climber
Root – Branched tap root system
Stem – Aerial weak stem, twiner
Leaf – Imparipmnately compound, Petcolate, Alternate, stipulate,
Leaf lets stipellate, stipels are pulvinate reticulate venation
Inflorescence – Solitary and Axillary
Flower -Zygomorphic Bracteate, Bracteolate (large) Bisexual complete
Dichlamydeous – Pedicellate, Pentarnerous & Hypogynous
Calyx – 5 sepals synsepalous valvate aestivation odd sepal anterior in position
Corolla – 5 petals apopetalous
1 standard petal -(Vexillum)
2 wing petals -(aiea)
2 keel petal(carina) – united at the base in descendingly imbricate aestivation

Androecium – 10 stamens diadeiphous
(9) + 1 (i.e.) nine united one free in 2 + bundleš
Anther – Dithecous , basifixed introse and devisce by Longitudinal Division
Gynoecium – Made up of ovary style & stigma
Ovary – Superior with a prominent stipe monocarpellary, unilocular with many ovules on marginal placentation

Style – simple incurved
Stigma – feathery
Fruit – Legume
Seed – non endospermous reniform

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 26

Question 16.
Describe any 3 Molecular method ¡n genetic analysis & phylogenetics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 27

Question 17.
Give an account of the botanical description of Datura metal
Answer:
Habit – Large erect, stout, herb
Root – Branched tap root system
Stem – Hollow, herbaceous strong odour
Leaf – Simple, alternate, petiolate, entire or deeply lobed glabrous, exstipulate unicostate reticulate venation
Inflorescence – Solitary & Axillary cyme
Flower – Actinomorphic, (Regular) Bracteate, Bracteolate, Bisexual Complete Dichlamydeous Pentamerous, sessile & hypogynous
Calyx – 5 sepals synsepalous
Valvate aestivation persistant
Corolla – 5 petals synpetalous plicate 10 lobed Twisted aestivation funneishaped
Androecium – 5 stamens – epipetalous altemi petalous .
Anther – dithecous, basifixed, introse longitudinal dehiseence
Gynoecium – Superior – bicarpellary bilocular,
Ovary – syncarpous basically bilocular later become tetralocular due to the formation of false septa Carpels obliquely placed ovules on swollen axile placentation
Style – simple long flu form
Stigma – bibbed
Fruit – Spinesent capsule opening by four apical valves persistent calyx
Seed – Endospermous
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 29

Question 18.
Give an account of botanical description of Allium cepa.
Answer:
Habit – Perrennial herb with bulb
Root – Fibrous adventitious root system
Stem – Underground bulb
Leaf – Radical leaves cylindrical fleshy with sheathing leaf bases & parallel venation
Inflorescence – scafrigerous, pedicels of equal length arising from apex of peduncle
Flower – Small white
Actinomorphic,
Bracteate, eBracteolate Bisexual Complete
Monochiamydeous.
Trimerous – hypogynous
Flowers – Protandrous
Perianth – 6 Tetals in 2 whorls of 3 each syntepalous Valvate acstivatíon
Androecium – 6 stamens in a whorls of 3 each epipelatous
apostamenous
Anther – Dithecous basifixed, introse and longitudinal dehiscence
Gynoecium
Ovary – Superior, tricarpellary trilocular 2 ovules in each locule on axile
placentation
Style – simple, slender
Sligma – simple
Fruit – loculicidal capsule.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 31

Question 19.
Give an account of the Economic importance of Fabaceae in the form of a Tabulation Economic Importance of the family Fabaceae
Economic
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 33

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 34
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 35

Question 20.
Economic Importance of Solanaceae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 36Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 38

Question 21.
Tabulate economic Importance of the family Liliaceae Economic Importance of the family Liliaceae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 40

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Suppose u, v = 10, 5 before the assignment. What are the values of u and v after the . sequence of assignments?
1, u := v
2. v := u
a) u, v = 5, 5
b) u, v = 5, 10
c) u, v = 10, 5
d) u, v = 10, 10
Answer:
a) u, v = 5, 5

Question 2.
Which of the following properties is true after the assignment (at line 3)?
1. — i + j = 0
2. i, j : = i + 1, j – 1
3. –?
a) i + j >0
b) i + j < 0
c) i + j = 0
d) i = j
Answer:
b) i + j < 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
If Cl is false and C2 is true, the compound statement,
1. if C1
2. S1
3. else
4. if C2
5. S2
6. else
7. S3
executes
a) S1
b) S2
c) S3
d) none
Answer:
b) S2

Question 4.
If C is false just before the loop, the control flows through. –
1. S1
2. while C
3. S2
4. S3
a) S1 ; S3
b) S1 ; S2 ; S3
c) S1 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
d) S1; S2 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
Answer:
a) S1 ; S3

Question 5.
If C is true, S1 is executed in both the flowcharts, but S2 is executed in
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 1
a) (1) only
b) (2) only
c) both (1) and (2)
d) neither (1) nor (2)
Answer:
a) (1) only

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
How many times the loop is iterated? i := 0
while i ≠ 5
i : = i + 1
a) 4
b) 5
c) 6
d) 0
Answer:
b) 5

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between a condition and a statement.
Answer:

ConditionStatement
It is a phrase that describes a test of the state.It is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart for a conditional statement.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Both conditional statements and iterative statements have a condition and a statement. How do they differ?
Answer:
Conditional Statement:

  • Statements are executed only once when the condition is true.
  • If condition statement.

Iterative Statement:

  • An iterative statement repeatedly evaluates a condition and executes a statement until it becomes false.
  • While condition statement.

Question 4.
What is the difference between an algorithm and a program?
Answer:

ALGORITHMPROGRAM
It is a step-by-step procedure to solve a problem.It is a set of instructions to solve a problem by the computer.
No need to follow the grammar of a languageFollow strictly the grammar of a programming language.

Question 5.
Why is a function an abstraction?
Answer:
Once a function is defined, it can be used over and over and over again. Reusability of a single function several times is known as an abstraction.

Question 6.
How do we define a statement?
Answer:
In a refinement, starting at a high level, each statement is repeatedly expanded into more detailed statements in the subsequent levels.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
For the given two flowcharts write the pseudo-code.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 3
Answer:
if condition is True
Execute Statement S1
else
Execute Statement S2
endif
PSEUDO CODE FOR SECOND FLOWCHART
if the condition is True
Execute Statement S1
Execute Statement S2
else
Execute Statement S2
endif.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
If C is false in line 2, trace the control flow in this algorithm.
1. S1
2. — C is false
3. if C
4. S2
5. else
6. S3
7. S4
Answer:
The control flow for the given algorithm is as follows:
S1
S3
S4
The condition is false so it executes S3. In this case S2 skipped.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
What is case analysis?
Answer:
The case Analysis statement generalizes the problem into multiple cases. Case Analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases.

Question 4.
Draw a flowchart for -3 case analysis using alternative statements.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 4

Where C1, C2 and C3 are conditions
S1, S2, S3 and S4 are statements.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 5.
Define a function to double a number in two different ways: (1) n + n,(2)2 x n.
Answer:
1. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = n + n

2. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = 2 x n

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B. Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. Write the specification for exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, and write a sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification:
exchange(A, B)
–inputs : A, B are real and > 0
–outputs: A, B are real and > 0
State representation
T = A
A: = B
B: = T

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Circulate the contents: Write the specification and construct an algorithm to circulate the contents of the variables A, B and C as shown below: The arrows indicate that B gets the value of A, C gets the value of B and A gets the value of C.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 5
Specification :
Circulated,B,C)
– – inputs: A,B,C all are real numbers
– – outputs: A,B,C, all are real numbers
T: = C
C: = B
B: = A
A: = T

Algorithm :
i) circulated,B,C)
ii) – – A,B,C
iii) T = C
iv) C = B
v) B = A
vi) A: = T

Question 3.
Decanting problem. You are given three bottles of capacities 5, 8, and 3 litres. The 8L bottle is filled with oil, while the other two are empty. Divide the oil in an 8L bottle into two equal quantities. Represent the state of the process by appropriate variables. What are the initial and final states of the process? Model the decanting of oil from one bottle to another by assignment. Write a sequence of assignments to achieve the final state.
Answer:
To divide the oil equally in the oil bottle, the following 7 steps are needed:

  • Pour 5L of oil into the second bottle. (3,5,0)
  • Pour 3L from the second bottle to the third. (3,2,3)
  • Pour 3L from the third to the first. (6,2,0)
  • Pour all 2L from the second to the third bottle (6,0,2)
  • Pour 5L from the first to the second bottle. (1.5.2)
  • Pour 1 L from the second to the third bottle. (1.4.3)
  • Finally, pour now all 3L from the third bottle to the first (4,4,0)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Assignment statement as follows:

  • E,F,T = 8,0,0
  • E,F,T = 3,5,0
  • E,F,T = 3,2,3
  • E,F,T = 6,2,0
  • E,F,T = 6,0,2
  • E,F,T = 1,5,2
  • E,F,T = 1,4,3
  • E,F,T = 4,4,0

Question 4.
Trace the step-by-step execution of the algorithm for factorial(4).
factorial(n)
— inputs i rs is an integer, n > 0
— outputs : f ‘=s n!
f, i := 1,1
while i ≤ n
f,i = 11= f x i, i+1
Answer:
Tracing steps:
factorial(5)
i) f = 1, i = 1
ii) f = 1 x 1, i = 2
iii) f = 1 x 2, i = 3
iv) f = 2 x 3, i = 4
v) f = 6 x 4, i = 5
vi) f = 24 x 5, i = 6
vii) condition 6 < 5 becomes false then display output f value as 24.

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which one of the following is odd?
(a) Python
(b) C++
(c) C
(d) Ctrl + S
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + S

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
_________ is a notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
There are important control flow statements.
(a) four
(b) three
(c) two
(d) five
Answer:
(b) three

Question 4.
_________ is a notation similar to programming languages.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 5.
A ………………. is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
(a) statement
(b) composition
(c) notation
(d) condition
Answer:
(a) statement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
_________ is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow chart

Question 7.
The algorithm can be specified as ……………….
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)
(b) a = b = 0
(c) C = A + B + C
(d) none
Answer:
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)

Question 8.
An algorithm expressed in a_________ is called a program.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 9.
Which one of the following is the elementary problem-solving technique?
(a) Specification
(b) Abstraction
(c) Composition
(d) decomposition
Answer:
(d) decomposition

Question 10.
_________ is formal.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 11.
How many different notations are there for representing algorithms?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 12.
_________ do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programs

Question 13.
Which one of the following algorithmic notations is used for communication among people?
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) PL
(d) Interpreter
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Question 14.
_________ notation is not formal nor exact.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 15.
The algorithmic notation similar to a Programming language is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) C ++
(d) C
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 16.
In _________, there is no need to follow the rules of the grammar of a programming language.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 17.
Which one is used for converting programs into computer-executable instructions?
(a) Converter
(b) Apps
(c) Translator
(d) exe files
Answer:
(c) Translator

Question 18.
_________ show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow charts

Question 19.
The notation which is not formal nor exact is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudocode
(c) Compiler
(d) Translator
Answer:
(b) Pseudocode

Question 20.
In flowcharts, _________ boxes represent conditions.
a) arrows
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) none of these
Answer:
b) diamond shaped

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 21.
Find the pair which is wrongly matched.
(a) Rectangular boxes – Statements
(b) Diamond boxes – Output
(c) Arrow – Control flow
(d) Parallelogram – Input
Answer:
(b) Diamond boxes – Output

Question 22.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with _________ outgoing arrows.
a) two
b) three
c) one
d) many
Answer:
a) two

Question 23.
The inputs and outputs are drawn using ……………….. boxes.
(a) rectangular
(b) diamond
(c) Parallelogram
(d) Oval
Answer:
(c) Parallelogram

Question 24.
In flow chart, _________ marked Start and the End are used to indicate the start and the end of an execution:
a) special box (oval)
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) parallelogram
Answer:
a) special box (oval)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 25.
The flow of control is represented in the flowchart by ………………..
(a) arrow
(b) dot
(c) box
(d) plus
Answer:
(a) arrow

Question 26.
A_________ is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.
a) statement
b) sentence
c) walkthrough
d) none of these
Answer:
a) statement

Question 27.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with ……………….. outgoing arrows.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 28.
Statements composed of other statements are known as_________ statements.
a) compound
b) bock
c) nested
c) none of these
Answer:
a) compound

Question 29.
_________ statement are compound statements.
a) input
b) output
c) comment
d) control flow
Answer:
d) control flow

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 30.
How many outgoing arrows are needed for rectangular boxes in the flow chart?
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(b) 1

Question 31.
___________ is a control flow statements.
a) Sequential
b) Alternative
c) Iterative
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
Which one of the following is not a control flow statement?
(a) Sequential
(b) Assignment
(c) Iterative
(d) Alternative
Answer:
(b) Assignment

Question 33.
Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of __________ cases.
a) disjoint
b) similar
c) recursive
d) none of these
Answer:
a) disjoint

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 34.
Which one of the following statements are executed one after the other as written in the algorithm?
(a) Sequential
(b) Iterative
(c) Conditional
(d) Decisive
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 35.
An__________ executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition.
a) iterative process
b) condition
c) sequential
d) None of these
Answer:
a) iterative process

Question 36.
Case analysis statement generalizes the statement into ……………….. cases.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 5
(d) multiple
Answer:
(d) multiple

Question 37.
Testing the loop condition and executing the , loop body once is called.
a) iteration
b) condition
c) sequential
d) none of these
Answer:
a) iteration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 38.
Which one of the following processes executes the same action repeatedly?
(a) Conditional
(b) Alternative
(c) Iterative
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Iterative

Question 39.
__________ breaking and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem.
a) Composition
b) Decomposition
c) Eliminating
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Decomposition

Question 40.
Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called ………………..
(a) alternative
(b) conditional
(c) Iteration
(d) Decomposition
Answer:
(c) Iteration

Question 41.
A(n)__________ is like a sub-algorithm.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 42.
A __________ can be used as a black box in solving other problems.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 43.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) There is no need for the users to know how the function is implemented in order to use it.
b) An algorithm used to implement a function may maintain its own variables.
c) users of the function need only to know what the function does, and not how it is done by the function.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 44.
Conditional statement is executed only if the condition is true. Otherwise, __________ .
a) terminates the algorithm
b) repeat the procedure
c) skip the loop
d) nothing is done
Answer:
d) nothing is done

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is programming language?
Answer:
A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.

Question 2.
What is a Pseudocode?
Answer:
Pseudocode is a mix of programming languages like constructs and plain English. Algorithms expressed in Pseudocode are not intended to be executed by computers but for human readers to understand.

Question 3.
What is flowchart?
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
What is a control flow statement? Classify it.
Answer:
Control flow statements are compound statements. They are used to alter the control flow of the process depending on the state of the process. They are classified as:

  1. Sequential
  2. Alternative
  3. Iterative

Question 5.
What are the constraints of a programming language?
Answer:

  • Programming language is formal.
  • Programs must obey the grammar of the programming language exactly. Even punctuation symbols must be exact.
  • They do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.

Question 6.
When a condition statement will be executed?
Answer:
It will be executed only when the condition statement is true.

Question 7.
What is the advantage of a flowchart?
Answer:
They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

Question 8.
What is a statement?
Answer:
A statement is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 9.
What do you mean by compound statement?
Answer:
Statements may be composed of other statements, leading to a hierarchical structure of algorithms. Statements composed of other statements are known as compound statements.

Question 10.
What are the control flow statements?
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements:

  • Sequential
  • Alternative
  • Iterative

Question 11.
What happen when a control flow statement is executed?
Answer:
When a control flow statement is executed, the state of the process is tested, and depending on the result, a statement is selected for execution.

Question 12.
Write the specification for finding minimum of two numbers.
Answer:
The specification of algorithm minimum is minimum (a, b)
– – inputs: a , b
– – outputs: result = a ↓ b.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
How many notations are there for representing algorithms? Explain.
Answer:
There are mainly three different notations for representing algorithms.

  • A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.
  • Pseudocode is a notation similar to programming languages. Algorithms expressed in pseudo-code are not intended to be executed by computers, but for communication among people.
  • A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Question 2.
What are the disadvantages of a flowchart?
Answer:
Flowcharts also have the following disadvantages:

  • Flowcharts are less compact than the representation of algorithms in a programming language or pseudo code.
  • They obscure the basic hierarchical structure of the algorithms.
  • Alternative statements and loops are disciplined control flow structures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Write a note on refinement.
Answer:
After decomposing a problem into smaller subproblems, the next step is either to refine the subproblem or to abstract the subproblem.
1. Each subproblem can be expanded into more detailed steps. Each step can be further expanded to still finer steps, and so on. This is known as refinement.

2. We can also abstract the subproblem. We specify each subproblem by its input property and the input-output relation. While solving the main problem, we only need to know the specification of the subproblems. We do not need to know how the subproblems are solved.

Question 4.
Write an algorithm that compares numbers and produces the result as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 6
We can split the state into an exhaustive set of 3 disjoint cases: a < b, a = b, and a> b. Then we can define compare() using a case analysis. The algorithm is as given below.

  1. compare(a, b)
  2. case a < b
  3. result := -1
  4. case a = b
  5. result := 0
  6. else – – a > b
  7. result: = 1

Question 5.
Construct specification and write an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Specification: divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
— outputs : q and r such that A = q x B
+ r and 0 ≤ r < B

Algorithm:
divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B * 0
— outputs : q and r such that
A = q X B + r and
— 0 < r < B
q := 0, A
while r ≥ B
q, r := q + 1, r – B

Question 6.
Explain Decomposition.
Answer:
It involves breaking down a problem into smaller and more manageable problems, and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem. Often, problems have structure.
We can exploit the structure of the problem and break it into smaller problems. Then, the smaller problems can be further broken until they become sufficiently small to be solved by other simpler means.
Their solutions are then combined together to construct a solution to the original problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Construct an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
divide (A, B)
– – inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
– – Outputs: q and r such that A = q x B + r and 0 < r < B
q : = 0, A
While r ≥ B
q, r : = q + 1, r – B

Question 8.
Draw a flow chart for Eat breakfast.
Answer:
Flowchart for Eat breakfast
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
What is flowchart? Explain the various boxes (symbols) used in flowchart.
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

In flowcharts, rectangular boxes represent simple statements, diamond-shaped boxes
represent conditions, and arrows describe how the control flows during the execution of the algorithm. A flowchart is a collection of boxes containing statements and conditions which are connected by arrows showing the order in which the boxes are to be executed,

i) A statement is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 8

ii) A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is true, and the false arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is false.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 9

iii) Parallelogram boxes represent inputs given and outputs produced.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 10

iv) Special boxes marked Start and the End is used to indicate the start and the end of execution.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Flowchart for integer division
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 12

Question 3.
Explain sequential statement with suitable example.
Answer:
A sequential statement is composed of a sequence of statements. The statements in the sequence are executed one after another, in the same order as they are written in the algorithm, and the control flow is said to be sequential. Let S1 and S2 be statements. A sequential statement composed of S1 and S2 is written as
S1
S2
In order to execute the sequential statement, first, do S1 and then do S2.

The sequential statement given above can be represented in a flowchart as shown in in the following Figure. The arrow from S1 to S2 indicates that S1 is executed, and after that, S2 is executed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 13

Let the input property be P, and the input-output relation be Q, for a problem. If statement S solves the problem, it is written as
i) –P
ii) S
iii) — Q

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
Explain alternative statement with an example. A condition is a phrase that describes a test of the state. If C is a condition and both SI and S2 are statements, then

if C
S1
else
S2

is a statement, called an alternative statement, that describes the following action:
i) Test whether C is true Or false.
ii) If C is true, then do SI; otherwise do S2.

In pseudo-code, the two alternatives S1 and S2 are indicated by indenting them from the keywords if and else, respectively. Alternative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 14

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the SI box. The false arrow points to the S2 box. Arrows out of S1 and S2 point to the same box, the box after the alternative statement.

Question 5.
Explain conditional statement with suitable example.
Answer:
Sometimes we need to execute a statement only if a condition is true and do nothing if the condition is false. This is equivalent to the alternative statement in which the else-clause is empty. This variant of alternative statement is called a conditional statement. If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
if C
S
is a statement, called a conditional statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true then do S; otherwise do nothing.

The conditional control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
Write a note on case analysis.
Answer:
An alternative statement analyses the problem into two cases. The case analysis statement generalizes it to multiple cases. Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases. For each case, the problem is solved independently. If C1, C2, and C3 are conditions, and S1, S2, S3, and S4 are statements, a 4 – case analysis statement has the form.

  1. case C1
  2. S1
  3. case C2
  4. S2
  5. case C3
  6. S3
  7. else
  8. S4

The conditions C1, C2, and C3 are evaluated in turn. For the first condition that evaluates to true, the corresponding statement is executed, and the case analysis statement ends. If none of the conditions evaluates to true, then the default case S4 is executed.

  1. The cases are exhaustive: at least one of the cases is true. If all conditions are false, the default case is true.
  2. The cases are disjoint: only one of the cases is true. Though it is possible for more than one condition to be true, the case analysis always executes only one case, the first one that is true.
  3. f the three conditions are disjoint, then the four cases are (1) C1, (2) C2, (3) C3, (4) (not C1), and (not C2) and (not C3).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Explain iterative statement with suitable example.
Answer:
An iterative process executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition C.
If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
while C
S
is a statement, called an iterative statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true, then do S and go back to step 1; otherwise do nothing.

The iterative statement is commonly known as a loop. These two steps, testing C and executing S, are repeated until C becomes false. When C becomes false, the loop ends, and the control flows to the statement next to the iterative statement.

The condition C and the statement S are called the loop condition and the loop body, respectively. Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called an iteration, not C is known as the termination condition.
Iterative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 16

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, true and false. The true arrow points to S box. If C is true, S box is executed and control flows back to C box. The false arrow points to the box after the iterative statement (dotted box). If C is false, the loop ends and the control flows to the next box after the loop.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which of the following activities is algorithmic in nature?
a) Assemble a bicycle
b) Describe a bicycle
c) Label the parts of a bicycle
d) Explain how a bicycle works
Answer:
a) Assemble a bicycle

Question 2.
Which of the following activities is not algorithmic in nature?
a) Multiply two numbers
b) Draw a kolam
c) Walk in the park
d) Braid the hair
Answer:
d) Braid the hair

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Omitting details inessential to the task and representing only the essential features of the task is known as
a) specification
b) abstraction
c) composition
d) decomposition
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 4.
Stating the input property and the as :-output relation a problem is known
a) specification
b) statement
c) algorithm
d) definition
Answer:
a) specification

Question 5.
Ensuring the input-output relation is
a) the responsibility of the algorithm and the right of the user
b) the responsibility of the user and the right of the algorithm
c) the responsibility of the algorithm but not the right of the user
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm
Answer:
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm

Question 6.
If i = 5 before the assignment i := i-1 after the assignment? the value of i is
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
If 0 < i before the assignment S := i-1 after the assignment, we cars conclude that
a) 0 < i
b) 0 < i c) i = 0 d) 0 >i
Answer:
b) 0 < i

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define an algorithm
Answer:
An algorithm is a step-by-step sequence of statements intended to solve a problem. An algorithm starts execution with the input data, executes the statements, and finishes execution with the output data.

Question 2.
Distinguish between an algorithm and a process.
Answer:
An algorithm is a sequence of instructions to accomplish a task or solve a problem.
An instruction describes an action. When the instructions are executed, a process evolves which accomplishes the intended task or solves the given problem.
We can compare an algorithm to a recipe, and the resulting process to cooking.

Question 3.
Initially, farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L, and the farmer crosses the river with a goat. Model the action with an assignment statement.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments for goat, grass, and wolf problem.

1. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L
2. farmer, goat = R, R
3. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, L, L
4. farmer = L
5. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, R, L, L
6. farmer, grass = R, R
7. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, L
8. farmer, goat = L, L
9. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, L
10. farmer, wolf = R, R
11. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, L, R, R
12. farmer = L
13. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, R
14. farmer, goat =R, R
15. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, R

Question 4.
Specify a function to find the minimum of two numbers.
Answer:

  1. – – minimum (a,b)
  2. – – inputs: a, b are real numbers.
  3. – – output: result: = minimum (a,b)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
If √2 = 1.414, and the square_root() function returns -1.414, does it violate the following specification?
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x ≥ 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Answer:
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x > 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Yes. It violates the specification. For a positive input (x > 0), the output square-root value should also be positive.

Part III

Explain in brief.

Question 1.
When do you say that a problem is algorithmic in nature?
Answer:
A Problem is algorithmic in nature when its solution involves the construction of an algorithm. Also when the

  1. Input data and output data of the problem are specified.
  2. The relation between the input data and the output data is specified.

Question 2.
What is the format of the specification of an algorithm?
Answer:
An algorithm is specified by the properties of the given input and the relation between the input and the desired output. In simple words, the specification of an algorithm is the desired input-output relation.

Let P be the required property of the inputs and Q the property of the desired outputs. Then the algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • – inputs: P
  • – outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
What is abstraction?
Answer:
Abstraction:
It is the facility to define objects. It also involves the removal of unnecessary attributes and defining only essential attributes. For example, when we represent the state of a process we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Question 4.
How is the state represented in algorithms?
Answer:
Computational processes in the real-world have stated. As a process evolves, the state changes.
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point. As the values of the variables are changed, the state changes.

Example:
State: A traffic signal may be in one of the three states: green, amber, or red. The state is changed to allow a smooth flow of traffic. The state may be represented by a single variable signal which can have one of the three values: green, amber, or red.

Question 5.
What is the form and meaning of the assignment statement?
Answer:
Variables are named boxes to store values. The assignment statement is used to store a value in a variable. It is written with the variable on the left side of the assignment operator and a value on the right side.
variable := value

When this assignment is executed, the value on the right side is stored in the variable on the left side. The assignment
m := 2 stores value 2 in variable m.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 1
If the variable already has a value stored in it, the assignment changes its value to the value on the right side. The old value of the variable is lost.
The right side of an assignment can be an expression.
variable := expression
In this case, the expression is evaluated and the value of the expression is stored in the variable.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
What is the difference between assignment operator and equality operator?
Answer:

Assignment operatorEquality operator
It assign right-hand side of the assignment operator value(constant / variable/ expression) to the left-hand side variable.It compares both operands and returns True if it is equal otherwise False. It is a relational operator.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Write the specification of an algorithm hypotenuse whose inputs are the lengths of the two shorter sides of a right-angled triangle, and the output is the length of the third side.
Answer:
hypotenuse(sl, s2).
— inputs: si and s2 both are real numbers
— outputs: I is a real number such that
l2 = s12+ S22.

Question 2.
Suppose you want to solve the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 by an algorithm.
quadratic_solve (a, b, c)
— inputs : ?
— outputs: ?
You intend to use the formula and you are prepared to handle only real number roots. Write a suitable specification.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
Solution;
quadratic_solve (a, b, c).
– inputs : a,b,c all are real numbers, a ≠ 0.
– outputs: x is a real number.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
such that b2 – 4ac > 0.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. For exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, represent the state by suitable variables, and write the specification of the algorithm.
Answer:
The specification of the algorithm:
exchange (A, B)
–inputs: A,B are real and >0
–outputs: A,B are real and >0
State representation
TEMP:=A
A:=B
B := TEMP

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which one of the following is an example of a process?
(a) Braid the hair
(b) Adding three numbers
(c) Cooking a dish
(d) Walk in the Road
Answer:
(c) Cooking a dish

Question 2.
An instruction describes an __________
a) action
b) input
c) output
d) flow
Answer:
a) action

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
How many basic building blocks construct an algorithm?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

Question 4.
Instructions of a computer are also known as _________
a) statements
b) structures
c) procedures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) statements

Question 5.
……………….. how many control flow statement is there to alter the control flow depending on the state?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 3
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 3

Question 6.
__________ is a step in solving a mathematical problem suggested by G Polya.
a) Understand the problem and Devise a plan
b) Carry out the plan
c) Review your work
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
……………….. statement is used to store a value in a variable.
(a) Assignment
(b) Sequential control flow
(c) Alternative control flow
(d) Iterative
Answer:
(a) Assignment

Question 8.
__________takes input data, process the data, and produce output data.
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Procedure
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Algorithm

Question 9.
Each part of the algorithm is known as ………………..
(a) input
(b) function
(c) variable
(d) program
Answer:
(b) function

Question 10.
When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in________
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Constant
d) Variable
Answer:
d) Variable

Question 11.
If i: = 3 before the assignment, i: = i + 1 after the assignment ………………..
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 0
Answer:
(b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 12.
In algorithm, the statement to be executed next may depend on the __________
a) algorithm step
b) state of the process
c) user direction
d) None of these
Answer:
b) state of the process

Question 13.
If i: = 10 before the assignment, then i: = i % 2 after the assignment
(a) 10
(b) 5
(c) 0
(d) 1
Answer:
(c) 0

Question 14.
There are control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.
a) two
b) five
c) four
d) three
Answer:
d) three

Question 15.
Initially the values of P and C are 4 and 5 respectively
– – P, C : = 4, 5
P : = C
C : = P. Then find P and C
(a) 4 and 4
(b) 5 and 4
(c) 5 and 5
(d) 4 and 5
Answer:
(c) 5 and 5

Question 16.
__________ control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, n alternative statement is executed.
a) alternative
b) iterative
c) random
d) sequential
Answer:
a) alternative

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 17.
How many Algorithmic designing techniques are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 18.
A ___________ takes an input and produces an output, satisfying a desired input-output relation.
a) function
b) union
c) structures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 19.
which one of the following is the equality operator?
(a) =
(b) = =
(c) + +
(d) – –
Answer:
(b) = =

Question 20.
___________ is the basic principle and technique for designing algorithm.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 21.
Which one of the following statements are not executed on the computers?
(a) Comment line
(b) Header file
(c) cin
(d) cout
Answer:
(a) Comment line

Question 22.
Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as __________
a) data hiding
b) abstraction
c) data analysis
d) None of these
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 23.
The values of the variables when the algorithm finishes is ………………..
(a) final stage
(b) final state
(c) last stage
(d) last state
Answer:
(b) final state

Question 24.
An algorithm is composed of__________
statement.
a) assignment
b) control flow
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 25.
Which one of the following is not a building block of the algorithm?
(a) data
(b) state
(c) variables
(d) functions
Answer:
(b) state

Question 26.
To solve a problem, we must state the problem__________
a) clearly and precisely
b) with ambiguity
c) with data hiding
d) None of these
Answer:
a) clearly and precisely

Question 27.
Reasoning:
I. We can store a value in a variable using the assignment operator.
II. We can change the value in a variable using the assignment operator.
III. Assignment operator is = =
(a) I and III are true
(b) I and II are true
(c) II and III are true
(d) I, II, III is true
Answer:
(b) I and II are true

Question 28.
Specification of an algorithm is the desired __________relation.
a) input-process
b) process-output
c) input-output
d) None of these
Answer:
c) input-output

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 29.
In which one of the control flow statements, if the condition is false, then the alternative statement will be executed ………………..
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(d) alternative

Question 30.
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the __________state.
a) initial
b) final
c) intermediate
d) None of these
Answer:
a) initial

Question 31.
If the statement is executed one after the other, then it is a control flow.
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 32.
We can write the specification in a standard __________part format.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) many
Answer:
a) three

Question 33.
Which one of the following is not a technique for designing algorithms?
(a) specifications
(b) abstraction
(c) encapsulation
(d) composition
Answer:
(c) encapsulation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 34.
__________defines the rights and responsibilities of the designer and the user.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Specification

Question 35.
How many parts are there in the specification is ………………..
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Question 36.
In algorithms, the state of a computation is abstracted by a set of __________
a) expressions
b) variables
c) functions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) variables

Question 37.
Identify the statement which is not true?
(a) An instruction describes an object
(b) the specification is one of the algorithm design techniques
(c) An algorithm is a step by step sequence of instructions
Answer:
(a) An instruction describes an object

Question 38.
_________ is a basic and important abstraction.
a) process
b) state
c) addition
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 39.
Sequential, Alternative, and Iterative comes under the classification of ……………….. :
(a) Building blocks of the algorithm
(b) control flow statements
(c) Algorithm design techniques
(d) Abstraction
Answer:
(b) control flow statements

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define State.
Answer:
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The State at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Question 2.
What is the statement?
Answer:
Instructions of a computer are also known as statements.

Question 3.
Define variable.
Answer:
The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable. We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 4.
What are the building blocks of algorithms?
Answer:
The building blocks of algorithms are;

  • Data.
  • Variables.
  • Control flow.
  • Functions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
Define control flow.
Answer:
The order in which the statements are executed may differ from the order in which they are written in the algorithm. This order of execution of statements is known as the control flow.

Question 6.
What is a function?
Answer:
The parts of an algorithm are known as functions. A function is like a sub-algorithm. It takes an input, and produces an output, satisfying the desired input, output relation.

Question 7.
How will you specify the algorithm?
Answer:
The algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • inputs: P
  • outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Question 8.
Define abstraction.
Answer:
Abstraction is the process of ignoring or hiding irrelevant details and modeling a problem only by its essential features.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 9.
What purpose abstraction is used?
Answer:
Abstraction is the most effective mental tool used for managing complexity. If we do not abstract a problem adequately, we may deal with unnecessary details and complicate the solution.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Define Alternative control flow statement.
Answer:
In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.

Question 2.
Justify goat, grass, and wolf problem is algorithmic.
Answer:
goat, grass, and wolf problem:
A farmer wishes to take a goat, a grass bundle, and a wolf across a river. However, his boat can take only one of them at a time. So several trips are necessary across the river.

Moreover, the goat should not be left alone with the grass (otherwise, the goat would eat the grass), and the wolf should not be left alone with the goat (otherwise, the wolf would eat the goat).

How can the farmer achieve the task? Initially, we assume that all the four are at the same side of the river, and finally, all the four must be on the opposite side. The farmer must be in the boat when crossing the river.
A solution consists of a sequence of instructions indicating who or what should cross. Therefore, this is an algorithmic problem.

Question 3.
Write the Iterative control flow statement.
Answer:
In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain variable.
Answer:
Variables are named boxes for storing data. When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in variables. The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable.
We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 5.
Write the following
(i) initial state
(ii) final state
Answer:
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the initial state, and the values of the variables when the algorithm finishes are known as the final state.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
When functions are needed?
Answer:
Algorithms can become very complex. The variables of an algorithm and dependencies among the variables may be too many. Then, it is difficult to build algorithms correctly.
In such situations, we break an algorithm into parts, construct each part separately, and then integrate the parts to the complete algorithm. The parts of an algorithm are known as functions.

Question 7.
Give an example for a function?
Answer:
Suppose we want to calculate the surface area of a cylinder of radius r and height h.
A = 2 πr² + 2πrh
We can identify two functions, one for calculating the area of a circle and the other for the circumference of the circle.
If we abstract the two functions as circle_area(r) and circle_circumference(r), then,
cylinder_area (r, h) can be solved as:
cylinder_area (r, h) = 2 X circle_area (r) + circle_circumference (r) X h.

Question 8.
What are the basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are:

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Question 9.
Write the specification format and explain.
Answer:
Specification format:
We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  • The name of the algorithm and the inputs.
  • Input: the property of the inputs.
  • Output: the desired input-output relation.

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation.
It is written as a comment which starts with — outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 10.
Write the specification of an algorithm for computing the square root of a number.
Answer:

  • Let us name the algorithm square_root.
    it takes the number as the input. Let us name the input n. n should not be negative.
  • It produces the square root of n as the output. Let us name the output y. Then n should be the square of y.

Now the specification of the algorithm is
a) square_root (n).
b) inputs: n is a real number, n > 0.
c) outputs: y is a real number such that y 2= n.

Question 11.
Give an example for abstraction.
Answer:

  • A road map is designed for drivers. They do not usually worry about hills so most hills are ignored on a road map.
  • A walker’s map is not interested in whether a road is a one-way street, so such details are ignored.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the three control flow statement.
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.

  1. In sequential control flow, a sequence of statements is executed one after another in the same order as they are written.
  2. In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.
  3. In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are;

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Specification: The first step in problem-solving is to state the problem precisely. A problem is specified in terms of the input given and the output desired. The specification must also state the properties of the given input, and the relation between the input and the output.

Abstraction: A problem can involve a lot of details. Several of these details are unnecessary for solving the problem. Only a few details are essential. Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as abstraction. For example, when we represent the state of a process, we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Composition: An algorithm is composed of assignment and control flow statements. A control flow statement tests a condition of the state and, depending on the value of the condition, decides the next statement to be executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Decomposition: We divide the main algorithm into functions. We construct each function independently of the main algorithm and other functions. Finally, we construct the main algorithm using the functions.

Question 3.
Explain the specification format.
Answer:
Specification format: We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  1. The name of the algorithm and the inputs
  2. Input: the property of the inputs
  3. Output: the desired input-output relation

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation. It is written as a comment which starts with outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain the state with a suitable example.
Answer:
State:
The state is a basic and important abstraction. Computational processes have stated. A computational process starts with an initial state. As actions are performed, its state changes. It ends with a final state.

The state of a process is abstracted by a set of variables in the algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Example:
Chocolate Bars: A rectangular chocolate bar is divided into squares by horizontal and vertical grooves. We wish-to break the bar into individual squares.
To start with, we have the whole of the bar as a single piece. A cut is made by choosing a piece and breaking it along one of its grooves. Thus a cut divides a piece into two pieces. How many cuts are needed to break the bar into its individual squares? In this example, we will abstract the essential variables of the problem.

Essential variables:
The number of pieces and the number of cuts are the essential variables of the problem. We will represent them by two variables, p and c, respectively. Thus, the state of the process is abstracted by two variables p and c.

Irrelevant details:
The problem could be cutting a chocolate bar into individual pieces or cutting a sheet of postage stamps into individual stamps. It is irrelevant. The problem is simply cutting a grid of squares into individual squares.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 2

The sequence of cuts that have been made and the shapes and sizes of the resulting pieces are irrelevant too. From p and c, we cannot reconstruct the sizes of the individual pieces. But, that is irrelevant to solving the problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Oscillations Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Oscillations

11th Physics Guide Oscillations Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
In a simple harmonic oscillation, the acceptation against displacement for one complete oscillation will be: (Model NSEP 2000 – 01)
(a) an ellipse
(b) a circle
(c) a parabola
(d) a straight line
Answer:
(d) a straight line

Hint:
The sketch between cause (magnitude of acceleration) and effect (magnitude of displacement) is a straight line.

Question 2.
A particle executing SHM crosses points A and B with the same velocity. Having taken 3 s in passing from A to B, it returns to B after another 3 s. The time period is:
(a) 15 s
(b) 6 s
(c) 12 s
(d) 9 s
Answer:
(c) 12 s

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 1
The time period is the time taken by a particle to return to B.

Question 3.
The length of a second’s pendulum on the surface of the Earth is 0.9 m. The length of the same pendulum on the surface of planet X such that the acceleration of the planet X is n times greater than the Earth is:
(a) 0.9 n
(b) \(\frac { 0.9 }{ n }\)m
(c) 0.9 n²m
(d) \(\frac{0.9}{n^{2}}\)
Answer:
(a) 0.9 n

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 2

Question 4.
A simple pendulum is suspended from the roof of a school bus which moves in a horizontal direction with an acceleration a, then the time period is:
(a) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)
(c) T ∝ \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(d) T ∝ (g² + a²)
Answer:
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Hint: T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
When a bus is moving
g’ = \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
∴ T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
Two bodies A and B whose masses are in the rati0 1:2 are suspended from two separate massless springs of force constants kA and kB respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such that their maximum velocities are in the ratio 1:2, the ratio of the amplitude A to that of B is:
(a) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{2 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(c) \(\sqrt{\frac{2k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(d) \(\sqrt{\frac{8k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)

Hint: vA : vB
Amplitude of A : Amplitude of B = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}: \sqrt{8 \mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)

Question 6.
A spring is connected to a mass m Suspended from it and its time period for vertical oscillation is T. The spring is now cut into two equal halves and the same mass is suspended from one of the halves. The period of vertical oscillation is:
(a) T’ = \(\sqrt{2}\)T
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(c) T’ = \(\sqrt{2T}\)
(d) T’ = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)
Answer:
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{k}}\)
When the spring is cut into two equal halves, then the force constant of each part is 2k.
When the mass is suspended from one of the halves.
Time period T’ = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2k}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)

Question 7.
The time period for small vertical oscillations of block of mass m when the masses of the pulleys are negligible and spring constant k1 and k2 is:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 3
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(c) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\frac { m }{ k }\)
The given arrangement is similar to the combination of springs in series.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 4

Question 8.
A simple pendulum has a time period T1. When its point of suspension is moved vertically upwards according as y = kt², where y is vertical distance covered and k = 1 ms-2, its time period becomes T2. Then, \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}^{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}^{2}}\) is (g = 10 ms-2
(a) \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 11 }{ 10 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 5 }{ 4 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 5

Question 9.
An ideal spring of spring constant k, is suspended from the ceiling of a room and a block of mass m is fastened to its lower end. If the block is released when the spring is un-stretched, then the maximum extension in the spring is:
(a) 4\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(b) \(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(d) \(\frac { mg }{ 2k }\)
Answer:
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 6

Question 10.
A pendulum is hung in a very high building oscillates to and fro motion freely like a simple harmonic oscillator. If the acceleration of the bob is 16 ms-2 at a distance of 4 m from the mean position, then the time period is: (NEET 2018 model)
(a) 2s
(b) 1s
(c) 2 πs
(d) πs
Answer:
(d) πs

Hint:
a = 16 m/s²; y = 4
a = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\)x = – ω²x
16 = \(\left|1-\omega^{2} \times 4\right|\)
∴ ω² = \(\frac { 16 }{ 4 }\) = 4
ω = 2
Time period T = \(\frac { 2π }{ ω }\) = πs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 11.
A hollow sphere is filled with water. It is hung by a long thread. As the water flows out of a hole at the bottom, the period of oscillation will:
(a) first increase and then decrease
(b) first decrease and then increase
(c) increase continuously
(d) decrease continuously
Answer:
(a) first increase and then decrease

Hint:
As the water flows out of the sphere, the time period first increases and then decreases. Initially, when the sphere is completely filled with water its centre of gravity (C.G) lies at its centre. As water flows out, the C.G begins to shift below the centre of the sphere.

The effective length of the pendulum increases and hence time period increases. When the sphere becomes more than half empty, its C.G begins to rise up. The effective length of the pendulum decreases and T decreases.

Question 12.
The damping force on an oscillator is directly proportional to the velocity. The units of the constant of proportionality are: (AIPMT 2012)
(a) kg m s-1
(b) kg m s-2
(c) kg s-1
(d) kg s
Answer:
(c) kg s-1

Hint:
Fd ∝ v
Fd = – bv
Fd = kv
∴ k = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{d}}{\nu}\)
Units of k = \(\frac{\mathrm{kgms}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\)
= kg-1
Units of proportionality constant = kgs-1

Question 13.
When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100 oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) of its initial value. What will be its amplitude when it completes 200 oscillations?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 9 }\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 7

Question 14.
Which of the following differential equations represents a damped harmonic oscillator?
(a) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + y = 0
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
(c) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + k²y = 0
(d) \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Hint:
For a damped oscillator F ∝ v
Total restoring force F = – ky – bv
b – damping constant; y – displacement
If F = – ky – by
then m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky – b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\)
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + ky + b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = 0
÷ m we get
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac { b }{ m }\)\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y = 0
If k = m and \(\frac { b }{ m }\) = r
then the equation becomes
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + r\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 15.
If the inertial mass and gravitational mass of the simple pendulum of length l are not equal, then the time period of the simple pendulum is:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{g} l}{m_{i} g}}\)
(c) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{g}}{m_{i}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{i}}{m_{g}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 8

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by periodic and non-periodic motion? Give any two examples, for each motion.
Answer:
Periodic motion: Any motion which repeats itself in a fixed time interval is known as periodic motion. Examples: Hands in a pendulum clock, the swing of a cradle.
Non-Periodic motion: Any motion which does not repeat itself after a regular interval of time is known as non-periodic motion. Example: Occurrence of Earthquake, the eruption of a volcano.

Question 2.
What is meant by the force constant of a spring?
Answer:
Force constant is defined as force per unit length.

Question 3.
Define the time period of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The time period is defined as the time taken by a particle to complete one oscillation. It is usually denoted by T.

Question 4.
Define frequency of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The number of oscillations produced by the particle per second is called frequency. It is denoted by f. SI unit for frequency is s-1 or hertz (Hz).
Mathematically, frequency is related to time period by f = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{T}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
What is an epoch?
Answer:
Initial phases of a particle is an epoch. At time t = 0 s (initial time), the phase φ = (φ0 is called epoch (initial phase) where φ0 is called the angle of epoch.

Question 6.
Write short notes on two springs connected in series.
Answer:
Let us consider two springs whose spring constant are k1 and k2 and which are connected to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 9
Let F be the applied force towards right as shown in Figure. The net displacement of the mass point is
x = x1 + x2
From Hooke’s law, the net force,
F = – ks(x1 + x2)
The effective spring constant can be calculated as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 11
When n springs connected in series, the effective spring constant in series is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 12
If all spring constants are identical
i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
\(\frac{1}{k_{s}}\) = \(\frac { n }{ k }\) ⇒ ks = \(\frac { k }{ n }\)
This means that the effective spring constant reduces by the factor n. So, for springs in series connection, the effective spring constant is lesser than the individual spring constants.

Question 7.
Write short notes on two springs connected in parallel.
Answer:
Let us consider only two springs of spring constants k1 and k2 attached to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 13
Net force for the displacement of mass m is F = – kpx … (1)
Where kp is called effective spring constant. Let the first spring be elongated by a displacement x due to force F1 and the second spring be elongated by the same displacement x due to force F2, then the net force
F = – k1x – k2x … (2)
Equating equations (2) and (1), we get
kp = k1 + k2 … (3)
Generalizing, for n springs connected in parallel,
kp = \(\sum_{i=1}^{n} k_{i}\) … (4)
If all spring constants are identical i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
kp = nk … (5)
It is implied that the effective spring constant increases by a factor n. So, for the springs in parallel connection, the effective spring constant is greater than the individual spring constant.

Question 8.
Write down the time period of simple pendulum.
Answer:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) in second.
where l – length of the pendulum.
g – acceleration due to gravity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 9.
State the laws of simple pendulum.
Answer:
Laws of simple pendulum: The time period of a simple pendulum.

Depends on the following laws:
(i) Law of length: For a given value of acceleration due to gravity, the time period of a simple pendulum is directly proportional to the square root of length of the pendulum.
T ∝ \(\sqrt{l}\) … (1)

(ii) Law of acceleration: For a fixed length, the time period of a simple pendulum is inversely proportional to the square root of acceleration due to gravity.
T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\) … (2)

Question 10.
Write down the equation of time period for linear harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Time period T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)s
where m is the mass, k is the spring constant.

Question 11.
What is meant by free oscillation?
Answer:
The oscillations in which the amplitude decreases gradually with the passage of time are called damped Oscillations.
Example:

  1. The oscillations of a pendulum or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  2. Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.
  3. Oscillations in a dead beat and ballistic galvanometers.

Question 12.
Explain damped oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The motion of the oscillator is called damped oscillation.
Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

Question 13.
Define forced oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
The body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency and due to the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.
Example: Soundboards of stringed instruments.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 14.
What is meant by maintained oscillation? Give an example.
Answer:
To avoid damping in an oscillation, energy is supplied from an external source, the amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. Such vibrations are known as maintained vibrations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from an external power supply.

Question 15.
Explain resonance. Give an example.
Answer:
The frequency of external periodic force (or driving force) matches with the natural frequency of the vibrating body (driven). As a result, the oscillating body begins to vibrate such that its amplitude increases at each step and ultimately it has a large amplitude. Such a phenomenon is known as resonance and the corresponding vibrations are known as resonance vibrations. Example: The breaking of glass due to sound

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

III. Long Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by simple harmonic oscillation? Give examples and explain why every simple harmonic motion is a periodic motion whereas the converse need not be true.
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion is a special type of oscillatory motion in which the acceleration or force on the particle is directly proportional to its displacement from a fixed point and is always directed towards that fixed point.

Example: Oscillation of a pendulum. SHM is a special type of periodic motion, where restoring force is proportional to the displacement and acts in the direction opposite to displacement.

Question 2.
Describe Simple Harmonic Motion as a projection of uniform circular motion.
Answer:
(i) Let us consider a particle of mass m moving with uniform speed v along the circumference of a circle whose radius is r in an anti-clockwise direction (as shown in Figure).

(ii) It is assumed that the origin of the coordinate System coincides with the center 0 of the circle.

(iii) If co is the angular velocity of the particle and 0 the angular displacement of the particle at any instant of time t, then θ = ωt. By projecting the uniform circular motion on its diameter a simple harmonic motion is obtained.

(iv) This means that we can associate a map (or a relationship) between uniform circular (or revolution) motion to vibratory motion.

(v) Conversely, any vibratory motion or revolution can be mapped to uniform circular motion. The position of a particle moving is projected on to its vertical diameter or on to a line parallel to vertical diameter.

(vi) Similarly, we can do it for horizontal axis or a line parallel to the horizontal axis.

Example: Let us consider a spring-mass system (or oscillation of pendulum) as shown in Figure. When the spring moves up and down (or pendulum moves to and fro), the motion of the mass or bob is mapped to points on the circular motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 14
Thus, if a particle undergoes uniform circular motion then the projection of the particle on the diameter of the circle (or on a line parallel to the diameter) traces straight line motion that is simple harmonic in nature. The circle is known as the reference circle of the simple harmonic motion.

Question 3.
What is meant by angular harmonic oscillation? Compute the time period of angular harmonic oscillation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 15
If a body is allowed to rotate freely about a given axis then the oscillation is known as the angular oscillation. The point at which the resultant torque acting on the body is taken to be zero. It is called mean position. If the body is displaced from the mean position, then the resultant torque acts such that it is proportional to the angular displacement. This torque has a tendency to bring the body towards the mean position.

Time period : Let \(\overline{θ}\) be the angular displacement of the body and the resultant torque \(\vec { τ }\) acting on the body is,
\(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {θ}\) … (1)
\(\vec { τ }\) = – k\(\vec {θ}\) … (2)
K is the restoring torsion constant, that is torque per unit angular displacement. If I is the moment of inertia of the body and \(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {α}\) is the angular acceleration then
\(\vec { τ }\) = I \(\vec{α}\) = k \(\vec {θ}\)
But \(\vec{α}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) and therefore
\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ I }\)\(\vec {θ}\) … (3)
This differential equation resembles simple harmonic differential equation.
By comparing equation (3) with simple harmonic motion given we get,
a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we have
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\) rads-1 … (4)
The frequency of the angular harmonic motion is given equation ω = 2πf is
f = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\) \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\)Hz … (5)
The time period is given equation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\); T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{I}{k}}\) second
In angular simple harmonic motion, the displacement of the particle is measured in terms of angular displacement \(\vec {θ}\).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 4.
Write down the difference between simple harmonic motion angular simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Comparison of simple harmonic motion and angular simple harmonic motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 16

Question 5.
Discuss the simple pendulum in detail.
Answer:
Construction:
A pendulum is a mechanical system which exhibits periodic motion. It has a bob with mass m suspended by a massless and inextensible string. The other end is fixed on a stand as shown in Figure (a). At equilibrium, the pendulum does not oscillate and is suspended vertically downward.

Such a position is known as mean position or equilibrium position. When a pendulum is displaced through a small displacement from its equilibrium position and released, the bob of the pendulum executes to and fro motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 17
Calculation of time period: Let l be the length of the pendulum which is taken as the distance between the point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bob. Two forces act on the bob of the pendulum at any displaced position, as shown in Figure (d),

  • The gravitational force acting on the body (F = mg) acts vertically downwards.
  • The tension in the string T acts along the string to the point of suspension.

Resolving the gravitational force into its components:

  • Normal component: It is along the string but in opposition to the direction of tension, Fas = mg cosθ.
  • Tangential component: It is perpendicular to the string i.e., along the tangential direction of arc of the swing, Fps = mg sinθ.

Hence, the normal component of the force is, along the string,
T – Was = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\)
Here v is speed of bob
T – mg cosθ = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\) … (1)
From the Figure, it is observed that the tangential component Wps of the gravitational force always points towards the equilibrium position. This direction always points opposite to the direction of displacement of the bob from the mean position. Hence, in this case, the tangential force is the restoring force. Applying Newton’s second law along tangential direction, we have
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 18
Where, s is the position of bob that is measured along the arc. Expressing arc length in terms of angular displacement i.e.,
s = lθ … (3)
Then its acceleration,
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) … (4)
Substituting equation (4) in equation (2), we get,
l\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – g sin θ
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) sin θ … (5)
Because of the presence of sinθ in the above differential equation, it is a nonlinear differential equation. It is assumed that “the small oscillation approximation”, sin θ ≈ θ, the above differential equation becomes linear differential equation.
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) θ
It is known as oscillatory differential equation. Hence, the angular frequency of this oscillator (natural frequency of this system) is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 19

Question 6.
Explain the horizontal oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 20
Let us consider a system containing a block of mass m fastened to a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant or spring constant k placed on a smooth horizontal surface (frictionless surface) as shown in Figure. Let x0 be the equilibrium position or mean position of mass m when it is left undisturbed.

When the mass is displaced through a small displacement x towards right from its equilibrium position and then released, it will oscillate back and forth about its mean position x0. Let F be the restoring force (due to stretching of the spring) that is proportional to the amount of displacement of block: For one-dimensional motion, we get
F ∝ x
F = – kx
where negative sign implies that the restoring force will always act opposite to the direction of the displacement. This equation is called Hooke’s law. It is noticed that, the restoring force is linear with the displacement (i.e., the exponent of force and displacement are unity). This is not always true. If we apply a very large stretching force, then the amplitude of oscillations becomes very large.
m\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – kx
\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)x … (1)
Comparing the equation (1) with simple harmonic motion equation a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we get
ω² = \(\frac { k }{ m }\)
which means the angular frequency or natural frequency of the oscillator is
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\)rad s-1 … (2)
The frequency of the oscillation is
f = \(\frac { ω }{ 2π }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\)\(\frac { k }{ m }\) Hertz … (3)
and the time period of the oscillation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π[/latex]\(\frac { m }{ k }\) seconds … (4)

Question 7.
Describe the vertical oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Consider a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant k attached to a ceiling as shown in Figure. Let the length of the spring before loading mass m be L. If the block of mass m is attached to the other end of the spring, then the spring elongates by a length l. Let F1 be the restoring force due to the stretching of spring. Due to mass m, the gravitational force acts vertically downward. A free-body diagram is drawn for this system as shown in Figure. When the system is under equilibrium,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 21
F1 + mg = 0 … (1)
But the spring elongates by small displacement l,
∴ F1 ∝ l ⇒ F1 = – kl … (2)
Substituting equation (2) in equation (1), we get
– kl + mg = 0
mg = kl
(or) \(\frac { m }{ k }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ g }\) … (3)
Suppose a very small external force is applied on the mass such that the mass further displaces downward by a displacement y, then it will oscillate up and down. Now, the restoring force due to this stretching of spring (total extension of spring is y + l) is
F2 (y + 1)
F2 = – k(y + 1) = – ky – kl … (4)
Since, the mass moves up and down with acceleration , by drawing the free body diagram for this case, we get
-ky – kl + mg = m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) … (5)
The net force acting on the mass due to this stretching is
F = F2 + mg
F = – ky – kl + mg … (6)
The gravitational force opposes the restoring force. Substituting equation (3) in equation (6), we get
F = – ky – kl + kl = ky
Time period:
Applying Newton’s law, we get
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y … (7)
The above equation is in the form of simple harmonic differential equation. Hence the time period is
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)second … (8)
The time period can be rewritten using equation (3) as
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)second.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 8.
Write short notes on the oscillations of the liquid column in U-tube.
Answer:
Let us consider a U-shaped glass tube which consists of two open arms with uniform cross¬sectional area A. Let us pour a non-viscous uniform incompressible liquid of density p in the U-shaped tube to a height h as shown in the Figure. If the liquid and tube are not disturbed then the liquid surface will be in equilibrium position O.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 22
It means the pressure as measured at any point on the liquid is the same and also at the surface on the arm (edge of the tube on either side), that balances the atmospheric pressure. Hence, the level of liquid in each arm will be the same. By blowing air one can provide sufficient force in one arm, and the liquid gets disturbed from equilibrium position O, It is meant, that pressure at blown arm is higher than the other arm.

A difference in pressure is created that will cause the liquid to oscillate for a very short duration of time about the mean or equilibrium position. Finally, it comes to rest.
Time period of the oscillation is
T= 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{2g}}\)second

Question 9.
Discuss in detail the energy in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
(i) Expression for Potential Energy:For the simple harmonic motion, the force and the displacement are related by Hooke’s law
\(\vec { F }\) = – k\(\vec { r }\)
F = – kx … (1)
the work done by the conservative force field is independent of path.
Calculation potential energy:
F = \(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) … (2)
Comparing (1) and (2), we get
\(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) = – kx
dU = – kx dx
This work done by the force F during a small displacement dx stores as potential energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 23
From equation,
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\) rad s-1
By substituting the value of force constant k = mω² in equation (3), we get
U(x) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (4)
where ω is the natural frequency of the oscillating system. For the particle executing simple harmonic motion from the equation,
y = A sin ωt
we get,
x = A sin ωt
U(t) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (5)
This variation of U is shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 24

(ii) Expression for Kinetic Energy:
Kinetic energy
KE = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mvx² = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)m(\(\frac { dx }{ dt }\))² … (6)
Since the particle executes simple harmonic motion, from equation y = A sin ωt
x = A sin ωt
∴ velocity is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 25

(iii) Expression for Total Energy: Total energy is the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy.
E = KE + U … (11)
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – x²) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (12)
Hence, cancelling x² term,
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² = r constant … (13)
Alternatively, from equation (5) and equation (10), we get the total energy as
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² sin²ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² (sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trigonometry identity,
(sin² ωt + cos² ωt) = 1
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² = constant
which gives the law of conservation of total energy.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 26

Question 10.
Explain in detail the four different types of oscillations.
Answer:
(i) Free oscillations: When the oscillator oscillates with a frequency that is equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator. Such an oscillation or vibration is known as free oscillation or free vibration.

Example:

  • Oscillation of a simple pendulum,
  • Vibration in a stretched string.

(ii) Damped oscillation: If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The energy of the oscillator is used to do work against the resistive medium. The motion of the oscillator is said to be a damped oscillation.

Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

(iii) Forced oscillations: In this type of vibration, the body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency. Because of the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.

Example:
Soundboards of stringed instruments.

(iv) Maintained oscillations: The amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. By supplying energy from an external source. Such oscillations are known as maintained oscillations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from external power supply.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Consider the Earth as a homogeneous sphere of radius R and a straight hole is bored in it through its centre. Show that a particle dropped into the hole will execute a simple harmonic motion such that its time Period is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 27
(Here, negative has no meaning. It can be neglected)
Comparing equation (1) & (2) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 28
Time period, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Hence proved.

Question 2.
Calculate the time period of the oscillation of a particle of mass m moving in the potential defined as
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 29
In the problem consider oscillation of particle into 2 cases via x < 0 (consider it as SHM where the time period is considered as t1) and another one as x > 0 (consider it as a motion under gravity, where time period is t2)

Note:
We want to find the total time period, which will be T = t1 + t2.
According to the conservation of energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 30
In case: 2 (Motion under gravity)
t2 = \(\frac { 2v }{ g }\) substituting equation (2) here we get,
t2 = \(\frac { 2 }{ g }\)\(\sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\)
⇒ 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\) … (4)
Adding equation (3) & (4)
Time period of oscillation,
T = t1 + t2
= π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) + 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\)

Question 3.
Consider a simple pendulum of length l = 0.9 m which is properly placed on a trolley rolling down on a inclined plane which is at θ = 45° with the horizontal. Assuming that the inclined plane is frictionless, calculate the time period of oscillation of the simple pendulum.
Answer:
The effective value of acceleration due to gravity (g) will be equal to the component of g normal to the inclined plane which is
g’ = g cos α
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g^{\prime}}}\) = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g \cos \theta}}\)
Length of the pendulum l = 0.9m
Angle of inclination θ = 45°
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 31

Question 4.
A piece of wood of mass m is floating erect in a liquid whose density is ρ. If it is slightly pressed down and released, then executes simple harmonic motion. Show that its time period of oscillation is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{\mathrm{Ag} \rho}}\)
Answer:
When a wood is pressed and released,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 32

Question 5.
Consider two simple harmonic motion along x and y-axis having same frequencies but different amplitudes as x = A sin (ωt + φ) (along x axis) and y = B sin ωt (along y axis). Then show that \(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~B}^{2}}-\frac{2 x y}{\mathrm{AB}}\) cosφ = sin²φ and also discuss the special cases when
(i) φ = 0
(ii) φ = π
(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\)
(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) and A = B
(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)
Note: when a particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions at right angle to each other the particle may move along different paths. Such paths are called Lissajous figures.
Given:
x = A sin(ωt-φ) … (1)
y = B sin ωt … (2)
In equation (1) use,
sin (A – B) – sin A cos B + cos A sin B
(1) ⇒ x – A sin ωt. cos (φ) + A cos ωt. sinφ
x – A sin cat. cos φ = A cos cot sin φ
squaring on both sides we get,
(x – A sin cot. cos φ)² = A² cos²cot sin²φ … (3)
In equation (3) sin at can be re-written as, \(\frac { y }{ B }\) [from equation (2)]. Also, use
cos²cot = 1 – sin²ωt in equation (3)
∴ (3) becomes
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 34
Hence proved.

Special cases:
(i) φ = 0 in equation (5) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 35
The above equation resembles equation of a straight line passing through origin with positive slope.

(ii) φ = π in equation (5)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 36
The above equation is an equation of a straight line passing through origin with a negative slope.

(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) in equation (5)
The above equation of an ellipse whose centre is origin.

(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ B }\) and A = B in equation (5)
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) = 1
⇒ x² + y² = A²
The above equation of a circle whose centre is origin.

(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\), cos \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) sin\(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) equation (5) we get,
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) – \(\frac{(\sqrt{2}) x y}{A B}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
The above equation is an equation of tilted ellipse.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 6.
Show that for a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(a) the average value of kinetic energy is equal to the average value of potential energy,
(b) average potential energy = average kinetic energy = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) (total energy)
Hint: average kinetic energy = < kinetic energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\) and average potential energy = < potential energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\)
Answer:
(a) Suppose a particle of mass m executes SHM of time period T. The displacement of the particle at any instant t is given by
y = A sin ωr … (1)
Velocity v = \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\)(sin ωt) = Aω cos ωt = ωA cosωt
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 37
Average potential energy over a period of oscillation is,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 38

(b) Total energy
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ω²y² + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – y²)
But y = A sinωt
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²(sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trignometry identity
sin² ωt + cos² ωt = 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 39

Question 7.
Compute the time period for the following system if the block of mass m is slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium position and then released. Assume that the pulley is light and smooth, strings and springs are light.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 40
Case (a):
When mass is slightly displaced vertically down: Now pulley is fixed rigidly here. When the mass is displaced by y and the spring will also be stretched by y.
Hence F = ky
Time period T = \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)

case (b):
When the system is released: WTien mass is displaced by y, pulley is also displaced by 4y,
∴ F = 4 Icy
∴ T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{4k}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
From the options given below, choose the operations managed by the operating system.
a) Memory
b) Processor
c) I/O devices
d) all of the above
Answer:
d) all of the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Which is the default folder for many Windows Applications to save your file?
a) My Document
b) My Pictures
c) Documents and Settings
d) My Computer
Answer:
a) My Document

Question 3.
Under which of the following OS, the option Shift + Delete – permanently delete a file or folder?
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Windows 10
d) None of the OS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
What is the meaning of “Hibernate” in Windows XP/Windows 7?
a) Restart the Computer in safe mode
b) Restart the Computer in hibernate mode
c) Shutdown the Computer terminating a!! the running applications
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications
Answer:
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications

Question 5.
Which of the following OS is not based on Linux?
a) Ubuntu
b) Redhat
c) CentOs
d) BSD
Answer:
d) BSD

Question 6.
Which of the following in Ubuntu OS is used to view the options for the devices installed?
a) Settings
b) Files
c) Dash
d) VBox_GAs_5.2.2
Answer:
b) Files

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Identify the default email client in Ubuntu.
a) Thunderbird
b) Firefox
c) Internet Explorer
d) Chrome
Answer:
a) Thunderbird

Question 8.
Which is the default application for spreadsheets in Ubuntu? This is available in the software launcher.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOffice Calc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) LibreOffice Spreadsheet
Answer:
b) LibreOffice Calc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
Which is the default browser for Ubuntu?
a) Firefox
b) Internet Explorer
c) Chrome
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
a) Firefox

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 10.
Where will you select the option to log out, suspend, restart, or shut down from the desktop of Ubuntu OS?
a) Session Indicator
b) Launcher
c) Files
d) Search
Answer:
a) Session Indicator

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate cut and copy options.
Answer:

COPYCUT
Copy text will leave the source as it is and place a copy in the destination.Move text will shift the source to the destination i.e., the text will change its position.
After the copy, the text available in both source and destination locations.After the move, the text available in the destination location alone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
What is the use of a file extension?
Answer:
File Extension is the second part of the file name. It succeeds the decimal point in the file name. It is used to identify the type of file and it is normally upto 3 to 4 characters long.
Example: exe, html.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 3.
Differentiate Files and Folders.
Answer:

FilesFolders
The files store data of any kind.The folders store files and other sub-folders.
Information stored in the computer only in the form of file.The folders often referred to as directories, are used to organize files on your computer.

Question 4.
Differentiate Save and Save As option.
Answer:

SaveSave As
The save command automatically saves the file using the same name, format and location, as when it was last saved or opened from. Save command opens a dialog box only first time saved.The save as command opens a dialog box every time in which the user can change the name of the file, the format, as well as the location of where the file is saved if needed.

Question 5.
What is open source?
Answer:
Open source refers to a program or software in which the source code is available in the web to all public, without any cost.

Question 6.
What are the advantages of open source?
Answer:
The reasons individuals or organizations choose open source software are:

  1. lower cost
  2. security
  3. no vendor ‘lock-in’
  4. better quality

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Mention the different server distributions in Linux OS.
Answer:
The server distribution in Linux OS:

  1. Ubuntu Linux
  2. Linux Mint
  3. Arch Linux
  4. Deepin
  5. Fedora
  6. Debian
  7. Centos

Question 8.
How will you log off from Ubuntu OS?
Answer:
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.

Part – III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Analyse: Why the drives are segregated?
Answer:

  1. It saves space and increases system performance.
  2. Sharing and protection.
  3. Segment and segregate the data to defend it from cyber-attacks.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
If you are working on multiple files at a time, sometimes the system may hang. What is the reason behind it. How can you reduce it?
Answer:
Too Many Applications Running :
Each application open on the system takes some internal and hardware resources to keep it running. If multiple apps and programs are running, your PC may run low on resources as memory is used by a number of applications.

Device Driver Issues:
Outdated or damaged drivers can also be the reason behind frequent computer freezes. If video drivers being installed on your system are not updated, the computer might hang up while you attempt to play a video or game on the system.

Operating System Issues:
To ensure the smooth functioning of the machine, make sure that all updates are installed. To be able to keep the system updated, it is vital that you use a legal copy of the operating system.

Excess Heating Up:
If the temperature of your system processor is higher than usual, the chances are that the computer may freeze.

Hardware Misconfigyratioo:
One major reason behind the computer freeze issue is hardware misconfiguration, This may have occurred due to misconfigured hardware component that you recently added to the computer. Alternatively, the hardware component you added recently may be incompatible with the computer.

Question 3.
Are drives such as hard drive and floppy drives represented with drive letters? If so why, if not why?
Answer:
Yes, hard drives and floppy drives are represented with drive letters.
A: drive is used for floppy disk of 3.5 inches and storage capacity of 1.44 MB.
B: drive is for floppy of size 5.25 inches and of storage capacity of 1.2 MB
So, we can say like
A: First Floppy Drive
B: Second Floppy Drive
C: D : E: …………….. Z: Hard Disk Drives, CD/DVD

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Write the specific use of Cortana.
Answer:
Cortana is your personal digital assistant on Windows 10 to help you find virtually anything on your device, track your packages and flights, inform you about weather and traffic information, manage your calendar and create reminders, and it can even tell you jokes.

Question 5.
List out the major differences between Windows and Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

WindowsUbuntu
Windows NT’ is the kernel used in WindowsLinux is the kernel used in Ubuntu
Needs to pay for WindowsIt is completely free and available as open-source
It support executable files (.exe), Virus threatening existsIt does not support executable files (.exe) so, mostly it is virus-free OS
Desktop OS does not support serverDesktop OS can also work as a server
It does not support multiple desktop environmentsIt supports multiple desktop environments
Installation is very simpleInstallation is quite complex process
Separately install MS Office in WindowsOS comes with many useful software like Office
It does not have own software managerIt has its own software manager
Software installation does that by simple installation package and instructions.It normally installs the software and tools by terminal
User friendlyIt is not user friendly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 6.
Are there any difficulties you face while using Ubuntu? If so, mention it with reasons.
Answer:

  1. Ubuntu has less hardware support for commercial/industrial/medical/ logistical therefore it’s less voted for use in big-time backends.
  2. Ubuntu doesn’t support middlewares such as C panel, cloud Linux and a plethora of other infrastructure or monitoring tools.
  3. Hard to install graphic drivers especially for old hardware. It is not possible to play modern games, because of poor graphics quality.
  4. The user switching from windows will not like the user experience on Ubuntu and will have difficulty in operating the OS.
  5. Ubuntu is not capable of playing MP3 files by default.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Differentiate Thunderbird and Firefox in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

  • Firefox is a browser is access the internet.
  • Thunderbird is an email client. We can install it on our computer and view our emails.
  • Both Firefox and Thunderbird are Mozilla products.

Question 8.
Differentiate Save, Save As, and Save a Copy in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:
Save: This will save the document without asking for a new name or location. It will overwrite the original.

Save As: This will prompt you to save the document using a dialog box. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location.

Save A Copy: This will prompt you to save a ‘copy’ using the same dialog box as ‘save as’. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location. If you choose the same file name and location it will overwrite the original.

If you changed the name or location of the document you will be working on the original document, not the copy. This means that if you make additional changes and then hit save the original will be overwritten with the new changes, but the copy you saved earlier will be left at the state of the Save A Copy.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the versions of the Windows Operating System.
Answer:
Versions of Windows Operating System
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 4
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Draw and compare the scan equivalence in Windows and Ubuntu.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 8

Question 3.
Complete the following matrix.

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbar
DesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows

Explorer

Seeing hierarchy of ail computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick Launch

Answer:

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbarTo open the applications
My ComputerDesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows ExplorerStart ButtonSeeing hierarchy of all computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick LaunchTaskbarTo quickly launch programs that we place in it

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Observe the figure and mark all the window elements. Identify the version of the Windows OS.
Answer:
The element of a windows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 9 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
Write the procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS. Compare it with Windows OS.
Answer:
The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS

Creating Files:

  • We can create the files with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon,
  • The following Figure shows the method of creating a File by right-clicking on the Desktop,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 12

A new File can also be created by using File menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 13

Deleting a File: A file created by us can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 14

Deleting a File: Deleting a File by using the Edit menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 15

Rename a file:

  • Select the file.
  • Right dick on the selected file and select Rename.
  • Type the new filename and then, press Enter

The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Windows OS

To create a file:

  • Open the application using the Start button or through Icon or using the Run command.
  • Enter the content.
  • Save the file using Ctrl + S.

Renaming Files:
Using the FILE Menu

  • Select the File you wish to Rename.
  • Click File → Rename.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter.

To delete a file:
Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu, or Click
    File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

To save a file:
Select the Save option from File Menu OR press Ctrl + S and then enter the file name and press OK.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Additional Questions and Answers

Part I & Part II

Part – I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
………………. is an Open source Operating System for desktop and server.
(a) Windows series
(b) Android
(c) iOS
(d) Linux
Answer:
(d) Linux

Question 2.
__________enables the hardware to communicate and operate with other software.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 3.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use ……………….
(a) Ctrl + shift
(b) Ctrl + click
(c) shift + click
(d) Ctrl + shift + click
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + click

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
__________controls the overall execution of the computer.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 5.
………………. is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
(a) Windows 7
(b) Windows 8
(c) Linux
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) Linux

Question 6.
The most popular Operating System for desktop and laptop computers.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
a) Windows Series

Question 7.
………………. icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Files and Folders are moved here.
(a) Trash
(b) Files
(c) Online shopping
(d) Libre Office Impress
Answer:
(a) Trash

Question 8.
The most popular Operating System for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
c) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
………………. manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
(a) Toolbar
(b) Title bar
(c) Session indicator
(d) Network indicator
Answer:
(d) Network indicator

Question 10.
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as __________
a) Multitasking
b) Multiuser
c) Parallel processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multitasking

Question 11.
Clock is available in ……………….
(a) system tray
(b) Files
(c) start
(d) My documents
Answer:
(a) system tray

Question 12.
Windows Operating System uses __________as input device.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 13.
The menu bar is present below the ……………….
(a) Taskbar
(b) Scroll bar
(c) Title bar
(d) Function bar
Answer:
(c) Title bar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 14.
__________ is used to enter alphabets, numerals and special characters.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Scanner
d) Optical Character Reader
Answer:
a) Keyboard

Question 15.
………………. has the task for frequently used applications?
(a) Quick Launch Tool bar
(b) Settings
(c) My pc
(d) This pc
Answer:
(a) Quick Launch Toolbar

Question 16.
__________program is an application program.
a) Word processing
b) Games and Spreadsheets
c) Calculator
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
SSD stands for ……………….
(a) Solid State Devices
(b) Simple Stage Driver
(c) Single State Drivers
(d) Synchronized State Devices
Answer:
(a) Solid State Devices

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 18.
__________is a file management activity.
a) Creating and Modifying file
b) Saving a file
c) Deleting a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
What is the name given to the document window to enter or type the text?
(a) Workspace
(b) Work Area
(c) Typing Area
(d) Space
Answer:
(a) Workspace

Question 20.
Windows 1.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
c) 1985

Question 21.
The disk drives mounted in the system can be seen by clicking ……………….
(a) Disk drive Icon
(b) Drive Icon
(c) Device Driver Icon
(d) My Computer Icon
Answer:
(d) My Computer Icon

Question 22.
Windows 3.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
a) 1992

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 23.
Windows 10 was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 2009
(b) 2012
(c) 2015
(d) 2018
Answer:
(c) 2015

Question 24.
Windows 98 introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1988
c) 1998
d) 1995
Answer:
c) 1998

Question 25.
The Rulers are used to set ……………….
(a) Orientations
(b) Header
(c) Footer
(d) Margins
Answer:
(d) Margins

Question 26.
Windows-XP introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2000
c) 1990
d) 2001
Answer:
d) 2001

Question 27.
Which functional key is used to bring the focus on, the first menu of the menu bar?
(a) F5
(b) F10
(c) F11
(d) F7
Answer:
(b) F10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 28.
Windows-7 introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2007
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
c) 2009

Question 29.
Which one of the following is used to open the search results dialog box?
(a) search
(b) See more results
(c) search more results
(d) searching web
Answer:
(b) See more results

Question 30.
Windows-10 introduced in the year __________
a) 2012
b) 2015
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
b) 2015

Question 31.
The keyboard shortcut to save a file is ……………….
(a) alt + s
(b) Ctrl + s
(c) Ctrl + alt + s
(d) winkey + s
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + s

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 32.
In which version Start button window introduced.
a) Windows-XP
c) Windows 2.x
b) Windows 3.x
d) Windows 95
Answer:
d) Windows 95

Question 33.
Applications or files or folders are opened using related shortcut icons by ……………….
(a) Click and drag
(b) double click
(c) click
(d) drag and drop
Answer:
(b) double click

Question 34.
In which Windows version plug and play was introduced.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows 95
Answer:
b) Windows 98

Question 35.
Which option is used to save the file?
(a) Ctrl + s
(b) Save
(c) File + save
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 36.
Which Windows version was designed to act as servers in the network.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
d) Windows-NT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 37.
ubuntu supports an office suite called ……………….
(a) Open Office
(b) Star Office
(c) Libre Office
(d) MS – Office
Answer:
(c) Libre Office

Question 38.
__________versions of Windows 2000 were released.
a) 6
b) 5
c) 4
d) 3
Answer:
c) 4

Question 39.
Which one of the following is a server distribution of Linux?
(a) Deepin
(b) Firefox
(c) MS.word
(d) Files
Answer:
(a) Deepin

Question 40.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for both a Web server and an office server.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
d) Server

Question 41.
Which option is used to delete all files in the Recycle bin?
(a) Remove the Recycle bin
(b) Empty the Recycle bin
(c) Clear the Recycle bin
(d) Clean the Recycle bin
Answer:
(b) Empty the Recycle bin

Question 42.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for high-traffic computer networks.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
b) Data Centre Server

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 43.
Which version of Windows introduced as a stable version.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-XP

Question 44.
In which version of Windows booting time was improved.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-7

Question 45.
__________feature is introduced in Windows-7.
a) Aero peek
b) Pinning programms to the taskbar
c) Handwriting recognition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 46.
What is used to interact with windows by clicking icons?
(a) Mouse
(b) Keyboard
(c) Monitor
(d) Printer
Answer:
(a) Mouse

Question 47.
Which version of Windows served as a common platform for mobile and computer.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows – 8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows – 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 48.
Windows-8 takes better advantage of_________
a) multi-core processing
b) solid-state drives
c) touch screens
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 49.
The start button was added again in the version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 50.
Hardware settings are used in which option?
(a) Monitor
(b) Display
(c) Theme
(d) My Computer
Answer:
(b) Display

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 51.
Cortana voice activated personal assistance introduced in _________version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 52.
The opening screen of Windows is called
a) taskbar
b) system tray
c) desktop
d) none of the above
Answer:
c) desktop

Question 53.
The notification area of ubuntu-desktop is otherwise called……………….
(a) Task bar
(b) Desktop
(c) status bar
(d) Indicator area
Answer:
(d) Indicator area

Question 54.
_________is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 55.
_________play a vital role in GUI based applications.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 56.
The icons which are available on the desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called __________icons.
a) quick launch
b) standard
c) default
d) desktop
Answer:
b) standard

Question 57.
Which menu has the rename option?
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) View
(d) Window
Answer:
(a) File

Question 58.
_________icons can be created for any application or file or folder.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 59.
By double-clicking the _________icon, the related application or file or folder will open.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 60.
The disk drive icons graphically represent _________disk drive options.
a) six
b) five
c) three
d) four
Answer:
b) five

Question 61.
Which option reboot the computer?
(a) Restart
(b) Boot
(c) Reboot
(d) Reselect
Answer:
(a) Restart

Question 62.
The disk drive icons available for __________
a) Removable storage
b) Network drive
c) Pen drive
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
__________is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 64.
_________ is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 65.
Who developed Ubuntu OS?
(a) Mark Shuttleworth
(b) Ricki Mascitti
(c) Dan Bricklin
(d) Bob Frankston
Answer:
(a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 66.
Application window can be __________
a) resized
b) maximized or minimized
c) placed side by side or overlap
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 67.
When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are__________
a) inactive
b) hidden
c) minimized
d) maximized
Answer:
a) inactive

Question 68.
A __________is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 69.
How many sets of scroll bars are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 70.
__________ window is used for typing, editing, drawing, and formatting the text and graphics.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 71.
__________window helps the user to communicate with the Application program.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
c) Application Window

Question 72.
The title bar of a window will contain __________button.
a) minimize
b) maximize
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 73.
What is the name given to the larger window?
(a) Work window
(b) Document window
(c) Application window
(d) Desktop
Answer:
(c) Application window

Question 74.
__________in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title.
a) Menu
b) Title
c) Tool
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Menu

Question 75.
In Windows 7, in the absence of the menu bar, click __________and from the drop-down menu, click the Layout option and select the desired item from that list.
a) System Properties
b) Install
c) Uninstall
d) Organize
Answer:
d) Organize

Question 76.
The __________is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.
a) application space
b) text space
c) content space
d) workspace
Answer:
d) workspace

Question 77.
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace __________
a) horizontally
b) vertically
c) either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) either A or B

Question 78.
Which option is used as a part of installing new software or windows update?
(a) Lock
(b) Restart
(c) Sleep
(d) Hibernate
Answer:
(b) Restart

Question 79.
Using the __________menu, we can start any application.
a) Start
b) File
c) Format
d) Tools
Answer:
a) Start

Question 80.
At the bottom of the screen is a horizontal bar called the __________
a) scrollbar
b) taskbar
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
b) taskbar

Question 81.
Task bar contains __________
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 82.
In the taskbar, the extreme right corner we can see the __________.
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) system tray
Answer:
d) system tray

Question 83.
System trays contains __________
a) volume control
b) network
c) date and time
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
In the taskbar, __________contains task for frequently used applications.
a) scroll bar
b) start button
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
c) quick launch toolbar

Question 85.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in windows-XP and Windows Vista.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 86.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-8.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
d) My Computer

Question 87.
The functionality of computer icon _________in all versions of Windows.
a) differs
b) remains the same
c) slightly change
d) None of these
Answer:
b) remains the same

Question 88.
By clicking the _________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-7.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 89.
We can also open an application by clicking __________on the Start menu, and the name of the application.
a) Run
b) All Programs
c) Accessories
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Run

Question 90.
To quit an application, click the __________ button in the upper right corner of the application window.
a) Minimize
b) Maximize
c) Resize
d) Close
Answer:
d) Close

Question 91.
We can also quit an application by clicking on the option in Windows 7.
a) File → Exit
b) File → Close
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 92.
In Windows-7, we can organize your documents and programs in the form of_________
a) files
b) folder
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 93.
We can_________ the files and folders.
a) move and copy
b) rename and delete
c) search
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 94.
To better organise our files, we can store them in __________
a) shortcut
b) folder
c) recycle bin
d) None of these
Answer:
b) folder

Question 95.
There are __________ways in to create a new folder.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 96.
__________is a command to create a new folder.
a) File → New → Directory
b) File → New → Folder
c) File → Open → Folder
d) File → New → New Folder
Answer:
b) File → New → Folder

Question 97.
The default name of the new folder is__________
a) New folder
b) Untitled
c) Noname
d) None of these
Answer:
a) New folder

Question 98.
To create a folder in the desktop __________command is used.
a) left-click →  New → Folder
b) right-click → New → Directory
c) double click → New → Folder
d) right-click → New → Folder
Answer:
d) right-click → New → Folder

Question 99.
_________ is an in-built word processor application in Windows OS.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 100.
In Windows OS to create and manipulate text documents __________is used by default.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 101.
__________is used to open Wordpad.
a) Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad.
b) Run → type Wordpad, click OK
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 102.
In Wordpad, save the file using __________
a) File → Save
b) Ctrl + S
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
In the Save As dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the _______drop down list box.
a) filename
b) look in
c) file type
d) None of these
Answer:
b) look in

Question 104.
We can use the _______ box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Look in
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Search

Question 105.
The most common way of opening a file or a Folder is to _______on it.
a) right-click
b) double click
c) click and drag
d) move the mouse
Answer:
b) double click

Question 106.
How many methods are there to rename a file?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) only one
Answer:
b) 3

Question 107.
_______is the command for cut operation.
a) Edit → Cut
b) File → Cut
c) Format → Cut
d) Window → Cut
Answer:
a) Edit → Cut

Question 108.
_______is the shortcut for cut operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
b) Ctrl + X

Question 109.
_______is the command for copy operation.
a) Edit → Copy
b) File → Copy
c) Format → Copy
d) Window → Copy
Answer:
a) Edit → Copy

Question 110.
_______is the shortcut for copy operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
a) Ctrl + C

Question 111.
_______is the command for paste operation.
a) Edit → Paste
b) File → Paste
c) Format → Paste
d) Window → Paste
Answer:
a) Edit → Paste

Question 112.
_______is the shortcut for paste operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
d) Ctrl + V

Question 113.
_______is used for copy operation.
a) Click Edit Copy
b) Press Ctrl + C
c) Right click → Copy from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 114.
_______is used for cut operation.
a) Click Edit → Cut
b) Press Ctrl + X
c) Right click Cut from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 115.
_______is used for paste operation.
a) Click Edit → Paste
b) Press Ctrl + V
c) Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 116.
There are _______methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) 2
b) 3
c) only one
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 2

Question 117.
_______is a method of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) Copy and Paste
b) Send To
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 118.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use _______
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Click

Question 119.
If you want to select consecutive files or folders, click on the first file and then use_______at the last file.
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Shift + Click

Question 120.
When we delete a file or folder, it will move into the _______
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 121.
To permanently delete a file or folder (i.e. to avoid sending a file or folder to the Recycle Bin), hold down the _______key, and press deletes on the keyboard.
a) ALT
b) SHIFT
c) CTRL
d) None of these
Answer:
b) SHIFT

Question 122.
_______is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user.
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 123.
The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without _______it.
a) deleting
b) copy
c) restoring
d) None of these
Answer:
c) restoring

Question 124.
To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select _______option.
a) Empty the Recycle Bin
b) Clear the Recycle bin
c) Trash
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty the Recycle Bin

Question 125.
_______option is used to switch to another user account on the computer without closing our open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
b) switch user

Question 126.
_________ option is used to switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) log-off

Question 127.
_______ option is used to reboot the computer.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 128.
_______option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 129.
_______option puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
c) sleep

Question 130.
_______option found only on laptop computers.
a) hibernate
b) shutdown
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) hibernate

Part II

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
_______refers to a program or software in which the source code is available on the web to the general public free of cost.
a) malware
b) free source
c) open-source
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source

Question 2.
_______is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.
a) malware
b) free source code
c) open-source code
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source code

Question 3.
_______is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 4.
_______is open source as its source code is freely available.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 5.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Ubuntu Linux
b) Linux Mint
c) Arch Linux
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Deepin and Fedora
b) Debian
c) CentOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
_______ is a Linux-based operating system.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 8.
_______ is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 9.
The Ubuntu system is developed by a UK based company called ._______
a) Microsoft
b) Borland International
c) Cambridge
d) Canonical Ltd
Answer:
d) Canonical Ltd

Question 10.
Ubuntu was conceived in the year _______
a) 1994
b) 2004
c) 2014
d) 2012
Answer:
b) 2004

Question 11.
Ubuntu was conceived by_______
a) Mark Shuttleworth
b) Mark Zuckerberg
c) Mark Shuttleberg
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 12.
The desktop version of Ubuntu supports _______ software.
a) Firefox
b) Chrome
c) VLC
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
Ubundu supports the office suite called_______
a) MS-Office
b) Star Office
c) Libre Office
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Libre Office

Question 14.
Ubuntu has in-built email software called_______
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 15.
_______ gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 16.
The best feature of Ubundu is _______
a) It is a free operating system
b) It is backed by a huge open source community
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 17.
_______ is based on the concept of a Graphical User Interface.
a) Ubundu
b) Microsoft Windows
c) Apple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
_______ is the icons in the Ubuntu OS.
a) Search your Computer
b) Files
c) Firefox Web browser
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
_______ is a word processor software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 20.
_______ is a spreadsheet software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LibreOfficeCalc

Question 21.
_______ is a Presentation software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 22.
_______ is the online shopping icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Bigshop
d) Wallmart
Answer:
a) Amazon

Question 23.
_______ is a Recycle Bin Icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Files
d) Trash
Answer:
d) Trash

Question 24.
In Unundu, the frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the _______
a) left
b) middle
c) right
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) right

Question 25.
The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the _______ .
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 26.
_______ manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
d) Network Indicator

Question 27.
_______ shows the current keyboard layout.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Text Entry Settings
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
c) Text Entry Settings

Question 28.
The keyboard indicator menu contains the_______ menu items.
a) Character Map
b) Keyboard Layout Chart
c) Text Entry Settings
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
_______ indicator incorporates your social applications.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
a) Messaging

Question 30.
From Messaging indicator, we can access _______
a) instant messenger
b) email clients
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 31.
_______ indicator provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
b) Sound

Question 32.
_______ indicator is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
c) Session

Question 33.
_______ displays the current time and provides a link to your calendar and time and date settings.
a) Indicator
b) Clock
c) System Tray
d) Notification Area
Answer:
b) Clock

Question 34.
_______ is a session option.
a) locking your computer and user/guest session
b) logging out of a session
c) restarting the computer or shutting down completely
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 35.
The _______ shows the name of the currently selected directory.
a) Title bar
b) System Tray
c) Notification Area
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Title bar

Question 36.
The toolbar displays _______
a) your directory browsing history
b) your location in the file system
c) a search button and options for your current directory view
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 37.
The default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as_______
a) Ambiance
b) Aspirant
c) Environment
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ambiance

Question 38.
The Launcher is equivalent to _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Desktop
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Taskbar

Question 39.
The vertical bar of icons on the left side of the desktop is called _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 40.
The Launcher provides easy access to _______
a) applications
b) mounted devices
c) Trash
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 41.
All current applications on your system will place an icon in the _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 42.
_______ icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS.
a) Search Your Computer
b) Find
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Search Your Computer

Question 43.
_______ icon is equivalent to My Computer icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 44.
We can directly go to Desktop, Documents using_______ icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 45.
By clicking the _______ icon, we can directly browse the internet.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bishop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 46.
_______ is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bigshop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 47.
_______ icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 48.
_______ icon will open LibreOffice Calc application.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 49.
_______ is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 50.
_______ icon is used to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 51.
_______ icon will let you add any additional applications you want.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) Ubundu Software
Answer:
d) Ubundu Software

Question 52.
Using _______ icon users can buy and sell any products online.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Online Shopping
d) Wallnnart
Answer:
c) Online Shopping

Question 53.
_______ icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System.
a) System Settings
b) Your Computer
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
a) System Settings

Question 54.
Match the following:
table
a) Trash 1. Online Shopping App
b) System Settings 2. Recycle Bin
c) LibreOffice Impress 3. Control Panel
d) Amazon 4. Presentation software
a) 2, 1, 4, 3
b) 4, 3, 1, 2
c) 3, 1, 4, 2
d) 2, 3, 4, 1
Answer:
d) 2, 3, 4, 1

Question 55.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) In Ubundu, all the deleted Files and Folders are moved to Trash
b) Similar to Windows OS, we can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon in Ubundu.
c) A new File or new Folder can also be created by using File menu in Ubundu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 56.
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session _______ option.
a) Log out
b) Suspend
c) Shutdown
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Part – I

Shot Answers

Question 1.
Name some distributions of Linux.
Answer:

  1. Fedora
  2. Ubuntu
  3. BOSS
  4. RedHat
  5. Linux Mint.

Question 2.
What are the most popular operating systems suitable for desktop and laptop computers?
Answer:
All the Windows Series like Windows Vista, Windows-7, etc operating systems are suitable for desktop and laptop computers.

Question 3.
What is Open source Operating system?
Answer:
It is the software in which the source code is available to the general public for use and modification from its original design, free of charge.

Question 4.
Which operating system suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods?
Answer:
iOS operating systems are suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPod.

Question 5.
What are the similarities between Ubuntu and other operating systems?
Answer:
All are based on the concepts of Graphical User Interface.

Question 6.
What is multitasking?
Answer:
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as multitasking.

Question 7.
What is a workspace of a window?
Answer:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document. The workspace is the element of a window.

Question 8.
What are the file management activities?
Answer:
File management activities are creating, modifying, saving, deleting files and folders.

Question 9.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000 and its application?
Answer:
The four versions of Windows 2000 are:

  • Windows 2000 – Professional – for business desktop and laptop systems.
  • Windows 2000 – Server – for both a Web server and an office server.
  • Windows 2000 – Advanced Server – for line-of-business applications.
  • Windows 2000 – Data Centre Server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 10.
What is Firefox?
Answer:
It is a browser.

Question 11.
What is a desktop?
Answer:
The opening screen of Windows is called Desktop.

Question 12.
Write a note on Icons.
Answer:
Icon is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc. Icons play a vital role in GUI based applications.

Question 13.
What do you mean by standard icon? Give an example.
Answer:
The icons which are available on desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called standard icons. The standard icons available in all Windows OS are My Computer, Documents and Recycle Bin.

Question 14.
How will you switch to desktop?
Answer:
We can move to the Desktop any time by pressing the Winkey + D or using Aero Peek while working in any application.

Question 15.
Define Window.
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.

Question 16.
Write note on document window.
Answer:
A document window is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.

Question 17.
Write a note on Recycle Bin.
Answer:
Recycle Bin: Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user, which means you still have an opportunity to recover them. The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without restoring it.

Question 18.
How will you restore file or folder from Recycle Bin?
Answer:
To restore file or folder from the Recycle Bin

  • Open Recycle bin.
  • Right-click on a file or folder to be restored and select the Restore option from the pop-up menu.
  • To restore multiple files or folders, select Restore all items.
  • To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select Empty the Recycle Bin.

Question 19.
How will you create a desktop shortcut?
Answer:
Creating Shortcuts on the Desktop:
Shortcuts to your most often used folders and files may be created and placed on the Desktop to help automate your work.

  • Select the file or folder that you wish to have as a shortcut on the Desktop.
  • Right-click on the file or folder.
  • Select Send to from the shortcut menu, then select Desktop (Create Shortcut) from the sub¬menu.
  • A shortcut for the file or folder will now appear on your desktop and you can open it from the desktop in the same way as any other icon.

Question 20.
How will you log off/shut down the computer?
Answer:
To Log off/Shut down the computer :

  • Click start to → log off (click the arrow next to Shut down) or Start Shutdown.
  • If you have any open programs, then you will be asked to close them or windows will Force shut down, you will lose any unsaved information if you do this.

Question 21.
Compare switch user and log off options.
Answer:

  • Switch User: Switch to another user account on the computer without closing your open programs and Windows processes.
  • Log Off: Switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.

Question 22.
When we use the Lock and Restart option?
Answer:

  • Lock: Lock the computer while you’re away from it.
  • Restart: Reboot the computer. This option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.

Question 23.
Write a note on the Sleep mode option.
Answer:
Sleep: Puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.

Question 24.
Write a note on Hibernate mode option? Where it is available?
Answer:
The Hibernate option is found only on laptop computers. It puts the computer into a low-power mode after saving all running programs and open windows on the machine’s hard drive for a quick restart.

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
How will you rename the files or folders?
Answer:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter

Question 2.
What are the merits of open source code?
Answer:
Open Source code is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.

Question 3.
List out the important functions of an OS?
Answer:
Following are some of the important functions of an Operating System:

  1. Memory Management
  2. Process Management
  3. Device Management
  4. File Management
  5. Security Management
  6. Control overall system performance
  7. Error detecting aids
  8. Coordination between other software and users

Question 4.
List the distributors of Linux.
Answer:
The most popular Linux server distributors are: Ubuntu Linux

  • Linux Mint
  • Arch Linux
  • Deepin
  • Fedora
  • Debian
  • CentOS

Question 5.
Write about Ubuntu.
Answer:
Ubuntu is a Linux-based operating system. It is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers. The system is developed by a UK-based company called Canonical Ltd. Ubuntu was conceived in 2004 by Mark Shuttleworth, a successful South African entrepreneur.

Question 6.
Write note on the Network indicator.
Answer:
Network indicator – This manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.

Question 7.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000?
Answer:

  1. Professional – business desktop and laptop systems.
  2. Server – used as both a web server and an office server.
  3. Advanced server – for a line of business applications.
  4. Datacenter server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 8.
Write note on the Sound indicator.
Answer:
Sound indicator – This provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.

Question 9.
What is a Window?
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program. The two types of windows are the application window and the document window.

Question 10.
Write about session indicators.
Answer:
Session indicator – This is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options like locking your computer, user/guest session, logging out of a session, restarting the computer, or shutting down completely.

Question 11.
How will you start an application?
Answer:

  1. Click the start button and then point to all programs. The program menu appears. Point to the group that contains the application you want to start and then click the application name.
  2. Click Run on the start menu and type the name of the application and click ok.

Question 12.
Write about Toolbar of Ubuntu.
Answer:
Toolbar – The toolbar displays your directory browsing history, your location in the file system, a search button, and options for your current directory view.

Question 13.
Write a note on Recycle bin.
Answer:
Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user. From the recycle bin, files can be restored back.

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Discuss the following Icons.
Answer:
Shortcut Icons:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open. This represents the shortcut to open a particular application.

Disk drive icons:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD – ROM/DVD Drive.
  3. Pen drive.
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 2.
What is a shortcut icon? Mention its types.
Answer:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open.
Type of shortcuts:

  1. Desktop shortcut
  2. Keyboard shortcut

Question 3.
Write notes on disk drive icons.
Answer:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD-ROM/DVD Drive
  3. Pen drive
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 4.
What is the application window? Explain with an example.
Answer:
It is an area on a computer screen with defined boundaries, and within which information is displayed.
Such windows can be resized, maximized, minimized, placed side by side, overlap, and so on.
An Application Window contains an open application i.e. current application such as Word or Paint. When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are inactive.

Question 5.
Explain various methods of creating Files and Folders.
Answer:
Creating files and Folders:
Creating Folders:
You can store your files in many locations – on the hard disk or in other devices. To better organise your files, you can store them in folders.
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:)
Step 3: Click on File → New → Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder in the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click → New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 6.
Write about Taskbar.
Answer:
At the bottom of the screen there- is a horizontal bar called the taskbar. This bar contains the Start button(left side), shortcuts to various programs, minimized programs, and in the extreme right corner you can see the system tray which consists of volume control, network, date and time, etc. Next to the Start button is the quick Launch Toolbar which contains tasks for frequently used applications.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 16

Question 7.
Explain Computer Icon.
Answer:
Computer Icon – By clicking this icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system. In Windows XP, Vista, this icon is called “My computer” in Windows 8 and 10, it is called “This PC”.
The functionality of the computer icon remains the same in all versions of windows as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 17

Question 8.
How will you copy files and folders?
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders:
There are variety of ways to copy files and folders:

The method I – COPY and PASTE:
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit → Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click → Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit → Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop:

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder you want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Your file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you search files or folders using the Computer icon?
Answer:
Procedure:

  • Click Computer Icon from desktop or from the Start menu.
  • The Computer disk drive screen will appear and at the top right corner of that screen, there is a search box option.
  • Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  • Just click and open that file or the folder.

Question 10.
How will you delete a file or folder?
Answer:
To delete a file or folder: Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu or Click File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

Question 11.
Represent overview of an operating system using a diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 18

Part II

Explain brief

Question 1.
What are the features of Ubuntu?
Answer:
Features of Ubuntu

  • The desktop version of Ubuntu supports all norma! software like Windows such as Firefox, Chrome, VLC, etc.
  • It supports the office suite called LibreOffice.
  • Ubuntu has in-built email software called Thunderbird, which gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
  • There are free applications for users to view and edit photos, to manage and share videos.
  • It is easy to find content on Ubuntu with the smart searching facility.
  • The best feature is, it is a free operating system and is backed by a huge open source community.

Question 2.
What are the names of the icons in the Ubuntu OS?
Answer:

  • Search your Computer
  • Files
  • Firefox Webbrowser
  • LibreOffice Writer
  • LibreOfficeCalc
  • LibreOffice Impress
  • Ubuntu Software
  • Amazon
  • System Settings
  • Trash

Question 3.
Explain about Ubuntu menu bar.
Answer:
Menu bar – The menu bar is located at the top of the screen, The menu bar Incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu. The frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the right. The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the indicator or notification area.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 19

Question 4.
Write a note on Text entry settings.
Answer:
Text entry settings: This shows the current keyboard layout (such as En, Fr, Ku, and so on. If more than one keyboard layout is shown, it allows you to select a keyboard layout out of those choices. The keyboard indicator menu contains the following menu items: Character Map, Keyboard Layout Chart, and Text Entry Settings.

Question 5.
Write about Ubundu desktop background.
Answer:
The desktop background Below the menu bar at the top of the screen is an image covering the entire desktop. This is the default desktop background or wallpaper;, belonging to the default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as Ambiance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 20

Question 6.
Explain Ubuntu Shutting down method.
Answer:
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session options
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out, Suspend or Shut down through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 21

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Explain the various mouse actions.
Answer:
The following are the mouse actions:

ActionReaction
Point to an itemMove the mouse pointer over the item.
ClickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the left mouse button.
Right-clickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the right mouse button. Clicking the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu with various options.
Double-clickPoint to the item on the screen, quickly press twice the left mouse button.
Drag and dropPoint to an item then hold the left mouse button as you move the pointer press and you have reached the desired position, release the mouse button.

Question 2.
Draw and explain the Elements of a window.
Answer:
The elements of a window
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 22

Menu Bar:
The menu bar is seen under the title bar. Menus in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title. Additionally, pressing Alt or F10 brings the focus on the first menu of the menu bar.

The Workspace:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.

Scroll bars:
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace horizontally or vertically.

Corners and borders:
The corners and borders of the window help to drag and resize the windows. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow when positioned over a border or a corner. Drag the border or corner in the direction indicated by the double-headed arrow to the desired size. The window can be resized by dragging the corners diagonally across the screen.

Title bar:
The first line of the window is called the title bar. It contains the name of the application on its left and the sizing buttons on its right.

Question 3.
How will you create a folder? Explain its methods with an example.
Answer:
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:.
Step 3: Click on File → New Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder on the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 4.
How will you create a file in Wordpad?
Answer:
To create files in Wordpad we need to follow the steps given below.

  1. Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad or Run → type Wordpad, click OK. Wordpad window will be opened.
  2. Type the contents in the workspace and save the file using File → Save or Ctrl + S.
  3. Save As dialog box will be opened.
  4. In the dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the Look in the drop-down list box.
  5. Type the name of the file in the file name text box.
  6. Click the save button.

Question 5.
Explain the method of finding Files and Folders.
Answer:
You can use the search box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.

To find a file or folder

  1. Click the Start button, the search box appears at the bottom of the start menu.
  2. Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  3. The files or the folders with the specified names will appear, if you click that file, it will directly open that file or the folder.
  4. There is another option called “See more results” which appears above the search box.
  5. If you click it, it will lead you to a Search Results dialog box where you can click and open that file or the folder.

Question 6.
Explain the various methods to Rename a file.
Answer:
You can rename using the File menu, left mouse button, or right mouse button.

Method 1:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 2:
Using the Right Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Click the right mouse button over the file or folder.
  3. Select Rename from the pop-up menu.
  4. Type in the new name.
  5. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 3:
Using the Left Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Press F2 or click over the file or folder. A surrounding rectangle will appear around the name.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Question 7.
How will you move the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Method I:
CUT and PASTE: To move a file or folder, first select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click on the Edit → Cut or Ctrl + X Or right-click → cut from the pop-up menu.
  2. To move the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the new location and paste it using Click Edit → Paste from the edit menu or Ctrl + V using the keyboard.
  3. Or Right-click →  Paste from the pop-up menu. The file will be pasted in the new location.

Method II:
Drag and Drop: In the disk drive window, we have two panes called left and right panes. In the left pane, the files or folders are displayed like a tree structure. In the right pane, the files inside the specific folders in the left pane are displayed with various options.

  1. In the right pane of the Disk drive window, select the file or folder we want to move.
  2. Click and drag the selected file or folder from the right pane to the folder list on the left pane.
  3. Release the mouse button when the target folder is highlighted (active).
  4. Our file or folder will now appear in the new area.

Question 8.
How will you copy the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders Method I – COPY and PASTE
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder we want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Our file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you copy the files and folders to a removable disk? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders to a removable disk
The following are methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk:

  • Copy and Paste
  • Send To

METHOD I: Copy and Paste

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. If the USB flash drive or external drive folder does NOT open automatically, follow these steps:
  3. Click Start → Computer.
  4. Double-click on the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.
  5. Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer.
  6. Right-click on the file you want to copy, then select Copy.
  7. Return to the Removable Disk window, right-click within the window, then select Paste.

METHOD II: Send To

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. Navigate to the folders in our computer containing files you want to transfer.
  3. Right-click on the file we want to transfer to your removable disk.
  4. Click Send To and select the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.

Part – II

Explain detail

Question 1.
Explain the elements of Ubuntu,
Answer:
Search your Computer Icon
This icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS. Here, you have to give the name of the File or Folder for searching them.

Files :
This icon is equivalent to the My Computer icon. From here, you can directly go to Desktop, Documents, and so on.

Firefox Web Browser:
By clicking this icon, you can directly browse the internet. This is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.

Online Shopping icon:
Using this icon users can buy and sell any products online.

System Settings Icons :
This icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System. But here, you need to authenticate the changes by giving your password. You cannot simply change as you do in Windows.

Trash :
This icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Flies and Folders are
moved here.

Question 2.
Explain the method of creating, deleting files/folders in Ubuntu.
Answer:
Creating, Deleting Files/Folders
Similar to Windows OS, you can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon. The following Figure shows the method of creating a File or Folder by right-clicking on the Desktop.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 23

A new File or new Folder can also be created by using the File menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 24
Deleting a File/Folder: A file/folder created by you can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 25

Question 3.
Explain LibreOffice Writer, LibreOffice Cacl and LibreOffice Impress.
Answer:
LibreOffice Writer
This icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 26

Libre Office Cac: This icon will open the LibreOffice Calc application. It is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 27

LibreOffice Impress: By clicking this icon, you can open LibreOffice Impress to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Operating system is a
a) Application Software
b) Hardware
c) System Software
d) Component
Answer:
c) System Software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Identify the usage of Operating Systems
a) Easy interaction between the human and computer
b) Controlling input & output Devices
c) Managing use of main memory
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
Which of the following is not a function of an Operating System?
a) Process Management
b) Memory Management
c) Security management
d) Complier Environment
Answer:
d) Complier Environment

Question 4.
Which of the following OS is a Commercially licensed Operating system?
a) Windows
b) UBUNTU
C) FEDORA
d) REDHAT
Answer:
a) Windows

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
Which of the following Operating systems support Mobile Devices?
a) Windows 7
b) Linux
c) BOSS
d) iOS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Question 6.
File Management manages
a) Files
b) Folders
c) Directory systems
d) All the Above
Answer:
d) All the Above

Question 7.
Interactive Operating System provides
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)
b) Data Distribution
c) Security Management
d) Real Time Processing
Answer:
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)

Question 8.
Android is a
a) Mobile Operating system
b) Open Source
c) Developed by Google
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Which of the following refers to Android operating system’s version?
a) JELLYBEAN
b) UBUNTU
c) OS/2
d) MITTIKA
Answer:
a) JELLYBEAN

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantages of management in Operating System?
Answer:

  1. Allocating memory is easy and cheap
  2. Any free page is ok, OS can take the first one out of the list it keeps
  3. Eliminates external fragmentation
  4. Data (page frames) can be scattered all over PM
  5. Pages are mapped appropriately anyway
  6. Allows demand paging and pre – paging
  7. More efficient swapping
  8. No need for considerations about fragmentation
  9. Just swap out the page least likely to be used

Question 2.
What is the multi-user Operating system?
Answer:
It is used in computers and laptops that allow same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time.
The users can also communicate with each other. Windows, Linux and UNIX are examples for multi-user Operating System.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a GUI?
Answer:
GUI – Graphical User Interface – It allows the use of icons or other visual indicators to interact with electronic devices, rather than using only text via the command line. For example, all versions of Microsoft Windows utilize a GUI, whereas MS-DOS does not.

Question 4.
List out different distributions of Linux operating system.
Answer:
Linux distributors are Ubuntu, Mint, Fedora, RedHat, Debian, Google’s Android, Chrome OS, and Chromium OS.

Question 5.
What are the security management features available in Operating System?
Answer:
Security Management features:

  1. File access level security
  2. System-level security
  3. Network-level security

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
What is multi-processing?
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating System. It has two or more processors for a single running process .

Question 7.
What are the different Operating Systems used in computer?
Answer:
Different operating system used:

  1. Single user, single Task Operating system
  2. Multi-user operating system
  3. Multiprocessing operating system
  4. Distributed Operating system

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of Time-sharing features?
Answer:

AdvantagesDisadvantages
Many applications can run at the same time.it consumes much resources.
The CPU is not idle.Constraint on security and integrity of data.
Provides the advantage of quick response.Reliability constraint exists.

Question 2.
Explain and List examples of mobile operating system.
Answer:
A Mobile Operating System (or mobile OS) is an operating system that is specifically designed to run on mobile devices such as phones, tablets, smartwatches, etc.
Example: Apple IOS

Google Android: Android is a mobile OS developed by Google, based on Linux and designed for smartphones and tabs. iOS was developed by Apple.
Example: Android, ColorOS, LGUX, MIUI.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What are the differences between Windows and Linux Operating systems?
Answer:

WINDOWSLINUX
It is a licensed OSLinux is an open-source operating system
Vulnerable to viruses and malware attacksMore secure
Windows must boot from the primary- partitionIt can be booted from an either primary or logical partition
Windows file name are not case sensitiveIn Linux, file names are case sensitive
Windows uses the microkernel which takes less spaceLinux uses the monolithic kernel which consumes more running space

Question 4.
Explain the process management algorithms in Operating System.
Answer:
The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor: FIFO, SJF, Round Robin, based on priority.

  1. First In First Out (FIFO) Scheduling – This algorithm is based on queuing technique. Technically, the process that enters the queue first is executed first by the CPU, followed by the next, and so on. The processes are executed in the order of the queue.
  2. Shortest Job First (SJF) Scheduling – This algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
  3. Round Robin Scheduling – Round Robin (RR) Scheduling algorithm is designed especially -for time-sharing systems, jobs are assigned, and processor time in a circular method.
  4. Based on priority – The given job (process) is assigned on a priority. The job which has higher priority is more important than ether jobs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the concept of a Distributed Operating System.
Answer:
The data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network (internet/intranet). The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access it as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily in the network
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Explain the main purpose of an operating system.
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Question 3.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of open-source operating systems.
Answer:
The benefits of open source are tremendous and have gained huge popularity in the IT field in recent years. They are as follows:

  1. Open-source (OS) is free to use, distribute and modify.
  2. Open source is independent of the company as an author who originally created it.
  3. It is accessible to everyone. Anyone can debug the coding.
  4. It doesn’t have the problem of incompatible formats that exist in proprietary software.
  5. It is easy to customize as per our needs.
  6. Excellent support will be provided by programmers who will assist in making solutions.

Some of the disadvantages are:

  1. The latest hardware is incompatible, i.e. lack of device drivers.
  2. It is less user-friendly and not as easy to use.
  3. There may be some indirect costs involved such as paying for external support.
  4. Malicious users can potentially view it and exploit any vulnerability.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
Software is classified into ………………. types.
(a) five
(b) two
(c) four
(d) six
Answer:
(b) two

Question 2.
_________ interacts basically with the hardware to generate the desired output.
a) hardware
b) freeware
c) software
d) None of these
Answer:
c) software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Which one of the following is not an algorithm?
(a) NTFS
(b) FIFO
(c) SJE
(d) Round Robin
Answer:
(a) NTFS

Question 4.
_________is a software classification.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 5.
Which one of the following is not a prominent operating system?
(a) UNIX
(b) IOS
(c) GUI
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
_________is an application software.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
Which one of the following comes under proprietary license?
(a) Apple Mac OS
(b) Google’s Android
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(a) Apple Mac OS

Question 8.
_________is an application software to play audio, video files.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
b) VLC player

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
………………. is the second most popular mobile operating system globally after Android.
(a) Microsoft Windows
(b) iOS
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(b) iOS

Question 10.
_________is a system software.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 11.
Which one of the following is System software?
(a) Operating System
(b) Language Processor
(c) Both a & b
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 12.
_________controls input, output of all other peripheral devices.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) VLC player
d) MS-Word
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 13.
Hardware and software are managed by ……………….
(a) GUI
(b) OS
(c) Bootstrap
(d) keyboard
Answer:
(b) OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 14.
Without a(n) _________, a computer cannot effectively manage all the resources,
a) Operating System
b) Language
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 15.
An OS that allows only a single user to perform a task at a time is called……………….
(a) Single user os
(b) Single task os
(c) Both a & b
(d) Multi-tasking os
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 16.
A user cannot communicate directly computer _________
a) software
b) hardware
c) Both A and B
c) None of these
Answer:
b) hardware

Question 17.
Identify the multi-user OS?
(a) Windows
(b) Linux
(c) UNIX
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 18.
The mobile devices mostly use _________as mobile OS.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Either A or B
d) None of th
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 19.
GUI stands for ……………….
(a) Geo User Interact
(b) Global User InterChange
(c) Graphical User Interface
(d) Global User Interface
Answer:
(c) Graphical User Interface

Question 20.
Operating System is basically – an interface between the _________
a) user and hardware
b) user and memory
c) programmer and hardware
d) None of these
Answer:
a) user and hardware

Question 21.
The operating system processes are executed by ……………….
(a) User code
(b) System code
(c) Task
(d) Program
Answer:
(b) System code

Question 22.
_________translates the user request into machine language.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 23.
NTFS is a ……………….
(a) game
(b) file management technique
(c) OS
(d) System-level security
Answer:
(b) file management technique

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
The main use of Operating 5ystem is _________
a) Controlling Input and Output Devices
b) Manage the utilization of main memory
c) Providing security to user programs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 25.
Unix was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 1970
(b) 1980
(c) 1990
(d) 1960
Answer:
(a) 1970

Question 26.
A user task is a _________function.
a) printing a document
b) writing a file to disk
c) editing a file or downloading a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 27.
………………. is a windows alternative open-source operating system.
(a) React OS
(b) Boss
(c) Redhat
(d) Fedora
Answer:
(a) React OS

Question 28.
______ OS is used in computers and laptops.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 29.
Which among the following is not an android mobile open source version?
(a) Donut
(b) Froyo
(c) Nougat
(d) Alpha
Answer:
(a) Donut

Question 30.
In _________OS users can also communicate with each other.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Single user
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Question 31.
_____ is an example of a multi-user Operating System.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) UNIX
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
A cheap computer can be build with _________
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 33.
_________is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer.
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) raspbion OS

Question 34
______ is a key feature of an OS.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 35.
_________is the only way that a user can make interaction with a computer.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
a) User interface

Question 36.
_________is the main reason for the key success of GUI.
a) User friendly
b) Fault tolerance
c) Robust
d) None of these
Answer:
a) User friendly

Question 37.
GUI means _________
a) Graphical User Interlink
b) Good User Interface
c) Graph User Interface
d) Graphical User Interface
Answer:
d) Graphical User Interface

Question 38.
The _________is a window based system.
a) command mode
b) GUI
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 39.
_________are playing vital role of the particular application.
a) Icons
b) Commands
c) Navigations
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Icons

Question 40.
The___________should satisfy the customer based on their needs.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 41.
The ________ should save the user’s precious time.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 42.
The ________is to satisfy the customer.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 43.
The ________should reduce the number of errors committed by the user.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 44.
_____ is the process of controlling and coordinating the computer’s main memory.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory/ management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory/ management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 45.
________is the process of assigning memory space to various running programs to optimize overall computer performance.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 46.
________involves the allocation of specific memory blocks to individual programs based on user demands.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 47.
________ensures the availability of adequate memory for each running program at all times.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory management

Question 48.
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve ________
a) the utilization of the CPU
b) the speed of the computer’s response
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 49.
The Operating System is responsible for the________
a) Keeping track of which portion of memory is currently being used and who is using them.
b) Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
c) Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
________ is function that includes creating and deleting processes.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Question 51.
________ providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 52.
A(n)____i_____ s the unit of work in a computer.
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 53.
A word-processor program being run by an individual user on a computer is a________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 54.
A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called as a ________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 55.
A computer processes are classified as _________ categories.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 56.
A category of computer process is _________
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 57.
________process is executed by system code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) operating system process

Question 58.
________process is execute by user code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) user process

Question 59.
All the computer processes can potentially execute concurrently on a ________CPU,
a) single
b) parallel
c) linear
d) None of these
Answer:
a) single

Question 60.
A process needs certain resources including _________ to finish its task.
a) CPU time
b) Memory
c) Files and I/O devices
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 61.
The Operating System is responsible for the_______activity.
a) Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs
b) Suspending and resuming processes
c) Providing mechanisms for process synchronization
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 62.
The ________ algorithm is mainly used to allocate the job to the processor.
a) FIFO or SJF
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
FIFO means ________
a) First In Fast Out
b) Fast In First Out
c) First In First Out
d) None of these
Answer:
c) First In First Out

Question 64.
________is based on queuing technique.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
a) FIFO

Question 65.
________algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
d) SJF

Question 66.
________algorithm is designed especially for time-sharing systems.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Question 67.
In the _______algorithm jobs are assigned and processor time in a circular method.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 68.
The challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s ________from hackers.
a) data
b) operation
c) hardware
d) all the above
Answer:
a) data

Question 69.
The Operating System provides ________levels of securities to the user end.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 70.
The Operating System security is ________
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have the ________
a) user name and password
b) ogin id
c) email id
d) access permission
Answer:
d) access permission

Question 72.
File access permissions can be granted by the__________
a) creator of the file
b) administrator of the system
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
________level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.
a) File access
b) System
c) Network
d) All the above
Answer:
b) System

Question 74.
________offers the password facility.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) Windows and Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Windows and Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 75.
________security is an indefinable one.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 76.
The people from all over the world try to provide ________security.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 77.
The Operating Systems should be ________
a) patience
b) error-free
c) robust
d) None of these
Answer:
c) robust

Question 78.
When there is a fault, the ________should not crash.
a) application program
b) operating system
c) data
d) None of these
Answer:
b) operating system

Question 79.
The operating system manages the ________on a computer.
a) files
b) folders
c) directory systems
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 80.
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of ________
a) blocks
b) files
c) archives
d) None of these
Answer:
b) files

Question 81.
FAT stands for ________
a) File Allocation Task
b) File Authentication Table
c) Fixed Allocation Table
d) File Allocation Table
Answer:
d) File Allocation Table

Question 82.
The FAT stores general information about files like_________
a) filename and type
b) size
c) starting address and access mode
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 83.
______ is the file access mode.
a) sequential
b) indexed / indexed-sequential
c) direct/relative
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
The ________ of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT.
a) system agent
b) file agent
c) file supervisor
d) file manager
Answer:
d) file manager

Question 85.
ext2 stands for _______________
a) secondary extended file system
b) second extended folder system
c) second extended file scheme
d) second extended file system
Answer:
d) second extended file system

Question 86.
ext2 used in_________
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 87.
NTFS stands for_______
a) New Technology Focus System
b) New Technology File System
c) New Technology Filter System
d) New Trend File system
Answer:
b) New Technology File System

Question 88.
NTFS developed by________
a) Apple
b) IBM
c) Intel
d) Microsoft
Answer:
d) Microsoft

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 89.
______ has two or more processors for a single running process.
a) Mega processing
b) Micro processing
c) Multi-processing
d) Mixed-processing
Answer:
c) Multi-processing

Question 90.
Processing takes place in parallel is known as __________ processing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) parent
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 91.
______feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) multi-processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 92.
________allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 93.
In _______ each task a fixed time is allocated.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 94.
In_________the processor switches rapidly between various processes after a time is elapsed or the process is completed.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 95.
________feature takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 96.
_________ is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 97.
In_________ OS the user can handle the data from different locations.
a) Multiuser OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 98.
________is the advantage of distributed Operating System.
a) A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
b) Many computer resources can be added easily to the network
c) Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 99.
_______reduces the load on the host computer.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 100.
Prominent OS is________
a) UNIX and Windows
b) Linux
c) iOS and Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 101.
Modem operating systems use a
a) command mode interaction
b) GUI
c) visual
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Question 102.
OS can be
a) Proprietary with a commercial license
b) Open source
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
_______is a proprietary with a commercial license OS.
a) Microsoft Windows
b) Apple Mac OS
c) Apple iOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 104.
________ is a open source free license OS.
a) Unix
b) Linux
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 105.
Unix derive originally from _______
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 106.
The development of the Unix began in the year__________
a) 1960
b) 1966
c) 1970
d) 1976
Answer:
c) 1970

Question 107.
The Unix was developed by _______
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Both A and B
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 108.
_______ OS can be modified and distributed by anyone around the world.
a) MS-DOS
b) Windows
c) Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Linux

Question 109.
Most of the servers run on Linux because_______
a) it is easy to customize
b) it is rigid
c) it is not case sensitive
d) None of these
Answer:
a) it is easy to customize

Question 110.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Ubuntu
b) Mint
c) Fedora
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 111.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) RedHat
b) Debian
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 112.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Chrome OS
b) Chromium OS
c) Both A and B
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 113.
The Linux operating system was originated in the year _________
a) 1990
b) 1991
c) 1890
d) 1980
Answer:
d) 1980

Question 114.
The Linux operating system was developed by________
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Linus Torvalds
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Linus Torvalds

Question 115.
Linux is similar to the________operating system.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) UNIX

Question 116.
Unix and the C programming language were developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 117.
_______OS is primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture based computers.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Windows

Question 118.
_______is a Windows-alternative open-source operating system.
a) RearOS
b) ReachOS
c) ReactOS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) ReactOS

Question 119.
________is a mobile device.
a) phones
b) tablets
c) MP3 players
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 120.
Android is a mobile operating system developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) Google
Answer:
d) Google

Question 121.
_________ OS is designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) Android
Answer:
d) Android

Question 122.
Google has developed _______for televisions.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Android TV

Question 123.
Google has developed _______ for cars.
a) Android Auto
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Auto

Question 124.
Google has developed_________for wrist watches.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Wear

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 125.
Google has developed separate Android for_________
a) game consoles
b) digital cameras
c) PCs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 126.
________ is an Android version.
a) Alpha and Beta
b) Cupcake and Donut
c) Eclair and Froyo
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 127.
_________ is an Android version.
a) Gingerbread
b) Honeycomb
c) Icecream Sandwich
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 128.
___________ is an Android version.
a) Jelly Bean
b) Kitkat and Lollipop
c) Marshmallow and Nought
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 129.
________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 130.
__________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed only for hardware of the Apple iPhone.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 131.
________is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 132.
________ is the top most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 133.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 1
is the logo of _______OS.
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 8

Question 134.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 2
is the logo of ______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Mac OS

Question 135.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 3
is the logo of______OS
a) Linux
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 136.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 4
is the logo of _______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Apple iOS

Question 137.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 5
is the logo of _______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 138.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 6
is the logo of ______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) Unix
Answer:
d) Unix

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an operating system?
Answer:
An operating system is software which serves as the interface between a user and a computer.

Question 2.
What are the classifications of software?
Answer:
Software is classified into two types:

  • Application Software.
  • System Software.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a Real-Time operating system?
Answer:
It is multi-tasking and multi-user operating system designed for real-time-based applications such as robotics, weather, and climate prediction software, etc.

Question 4.
What is system software?
Answer:
The system software is a type of computer program that is designed to run the computer’s hardware and application programs. Example: Operating System.

Question 5.
What are the advantages of Distributed Operating system?
Answer:
Resources can be used in different locations. Improves interaction with customers and clients. Reduces load on host computers. The data can be exchanged via email and chat.

Question 6.
List any 4 system software.
Answer:

  1. Operating System.
  2. Language Processor.
  3. Compiler.
  4. Loader.

Question 7.
Explain Round Robin Scheduling.
Answer:
This type of scheduling is also known as the Time-sharing scheduling process. In this, each program is given a fixed amount of time to execute.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 8.
What are the functions of an operating system?
Answer:
The functions of an Operating System include file management, memory management, process management and device management and many more.

Question 9.
Mention different management techniques?
Answer:
Single continuous allocation, Partitioned allocation, Paged memory management, Segmented memory management.

Question 10.
What are the popular operating systems used in mobile devices?
Answer:
The mobile devices mostly use Android and iOS as mobile OS.

Question 11.
What is an Android?
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Question 12.
How OS cars be developed and released?
Answer:
OS can be either proprietary with a commercial license or can be open source.

Question 13.
What is Process Management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 14.
Write note on Microsoft Windows.
Answer:
Microsoft Windows is a family of proprietary operating systems designed by Microsoft Corporation and primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture-based computers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
What are the 3 levels of security?
Answer:

  1. File Access Level
  2. System Level
  3. Network Level.

Question 16.
Write about raspbion OS.
Answer:
Raspbion OS is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer, what every part of a circuit board does, and finally how to code apps or games. The platform is available in pre-designed kits.

Question 17.
Write not on User Interface.
Answer:
User interface is one of the significant features in Operating System. The only way that users can make interact with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life.

Question 18.
What is the objective of memory management?
Answer:
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve both the utilization of the CPU and the speed of the computer’s response to its users via main memory.

Question 19.
What is process management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 20.
What is the process? Give an example.
Answer:
A process is the unit of work in a computer. A word¬processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.

Question 21.
Give any two examples for a process. Examples:
Answer:
A word-processing program being run by an individual user on a computer.
System task, such as sending output to a printer or screen.

Question 22.
What is the classification of a process?
Answer:
A computer consists of a collection of processes. They are classified as two categories:

  1. Operating System processes are executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

Question 23.
What are the requirements of a process?
Answer:
A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
What is the major challenge in the computer and software industry?
Answer:
The major challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s legitimate data from hackers.

Question 25.
Explain File Access level security.
Answer:
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have access permission. Permissions can either be granted by the creator of the file or by the administrator of the system.

Question 26.
How will you offer system-level security?
Answer:
System-level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.

Question 27.
Which OS offers system-level security?
Answer:
Both Windows and Linux offer the password facility to enable system-level security.

Question 28.
Write a note on network-level security.
Answer:
Network security is an indefinable one. So people from all over the world try to provide such security.

Question 29.
Write a note on Fault Tolerance.
Answer:
Fault Tolerance: The Operating Systems should be robust. When there is a fault, the Operating System should not crash, instead, the Operating System has fault tolerance capabilities and retains the existing state of the system.

Question 30.
How data is stored in a computer?
Answer:
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).

Question 31.
What will be stored in FAT?
Answer:
The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address, and access mode.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 32.
What are the various file access modes?
Answer:
File access modes are:

  • Sequential.
  • Indexed.
  • Indexed-sequential.
  • Direct.
  • Relative.

Question 33.
Write note on file manager.
Answer:
The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT,

Question 34.
What is multi-process?
Answer:
This is one of the features of Operating System, It has two or more processors for a single running process. Each processor works on different parts of the same task or on two or more different tasks. This feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.

Question 35.
Write note on parallel processing.
Answer:
Processing takes place in parallel is known as parallel processing.

Question 36.
Write a note on Time Sharing,
Answer:
It allows the execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently. For each task, a fixed time is allocated. This division of time is called Time- sharing.

Question 37.
Why distributed operating system is used?
Answer:
The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 38.
What are the advantages of GUI?
Answer:
A GUI lets you use your mouse to click icons, buttons, menus, and everything is clearly displayed on the screen using a combination of graphics and text elements.

Question 39.
What are the key features of OS?
Answer:
Features of the Operating System:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 7

Question 40.
What devices are controlled by OS?
Answer:
OS controls input, output and other peripheral devices such as disk drives, printers and electronic gadgets

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
Write a short note on Android.
Answer:
Android:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets. Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars, and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface. Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs, and other electronic gadgets.

Question 2.
List various OS with their symbol.
Answer:
Various Operating Systems:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 8

Question 3.
Explain the classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Answer:
Classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 9

Question 4.
Write a note on iOS – iPhone OS.
Answer:
iOS (formerly iPhone OS) is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc., exclusively for its hardware. It is the Operating System that presently powers many of the company’s mobile devices, including the iPhone, iPad, and iPod Touch. It is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally after Android.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
List the various Linux distributions.
Answer:
Linux Distributions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 10

Question 6.
Write a note on single-user OS?
Answer:
An os allows only a single user to perform a task at a time. It is called a single user and single task os.
Example: MS-DOS.

Question 7.
Explain Android OS.
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux and designed primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface.

Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs and other electronic gadgets.

Question 8.
What are the various Android versions?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Define Process?
Answer:

  1. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer.
  2. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.
  3. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen can also be called a process.

Question 10.
What are the points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.
Answer:
The following points are considered when User
The interface is designed for an application.

  • The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  • The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  • The user interface should save user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus,Window,Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  • The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also to satisfy the customer.
  • The user interface should reduce number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors.

Question 11.
Name the activities done by os related to the process management?
Answer:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPU.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

Question 12.
What are the responsibilities of the Operating System in connection with memory management?
Answer:
The Operating System is responsible for the following activities in connection with memory management:

  • Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
  • Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
  • Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 13.
Write a note on the File Allocations Table (FAT).
Answer:

  1. Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of flies and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).
  2. The FAT stores general information about files like file name, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential / indexed / indexed – sequential / direct / relative).

Question 14.
Explain File Management.
Answer:
File Management:
File management is an important function of OS which handles the data storage techniques. The operating system manages the files, folders, and directory systems on a computer.

Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT). The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential/indexed/indexed-sequential/direct/ relative).

The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT. The OS also takes care of the files that are opened with proper access rights to read or edit them.

There are few other file management techniques available like Next-Generation File System (NTFS) and ext2 (Linux).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
Write a note on React OS.
React os is a window – alternative open-source os which is being developed on the principles of windows – without using any of the Microsoft code.

PART – IV

Explain in detail.

Question 1.
What is the Need for Operating System? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operating System has become essential to enable the users to design applications without the knowledge of the computer’s internal structure of hardware. Operating System manages all the Software and Hardware.

Most of the time there are many different computer programmes running at the same time, they all need to access the Computers, CPU, Memory, and Storage. The need for an Operating System is basically – an interface between the user and hardware.

Interaction of Operating system and user
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 12

Operating System works as translator, while it translates the user request into machine language (Binary language), processes it and then sends it back to Operating System. Operating System converts processed information into the user-readable form.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Explain User Interface?
Answer:
User Interface:
The user interface is one of the significant features of the Operating System. The only way that a user can make interacting with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life. This is the main reason for the key success of GUI (Graphical User Interface) based Operating System. The GUI is a window-based system with a pointing device to direct I/O, choose from menus, make selections, and a keyboard to enter text. Its vibrant colours attract the user very easily. Beginners are impressed by the help and pop-up window message boxes. Icons are playing a vital role in the particular application.

Now Linux distribution is also available as a GUI-based Operating System. The following points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.

  1. The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  2. The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  3. The user interface should save the user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus, Window, Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  4. The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also designed to satisfy the customer.
  5. The user interface should reduce the number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors (Error Log File)

Question 4.
Explain distributed operating system.
Answer:
This feature takes care of the data and applications that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network. The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily to the network.
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Question 5.
Explain process Management.
Answer:
Process Management:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called a Process.

A computer consists of a collection of processes, they are classified into two categories:

  1. Operating System processes which is executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

All these processes can potentially execute concurrently on a single CPU. A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

The Operating System is responsible for the following activities associated with the process management:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor.

  1. FIFO
  2. SJF
  3. Round Robin
  4. Based on Priority

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

ACTIVITY

Question 1.
Draw a line between the operating system logo and the correct description.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 13

Question 2.
Discuss and provide suitable answers to the questions below.
Answer:
One of the functions of an Operating System is multi-tasking.
i) Explain one reason why multi-tasking is needed in an operating system.
Reasons:

  • CPU is used most of the time and never becomes idle.
  • The system looks fast as all the tasks run in parallel.
  • Short-time jobs are completed faster than long-time jobs.
  • Resources are used nicely.
  • Total read time is taken to execute program/job decreases.
  • Response time is shorter.

ii) State two other functions of an Operating System.
Disk Management:
The operating system manages the disk space. It manages the stored files and folders in a proper way.

Device Controlling:
The operating system also controls all devices attached to the computer. The hardware devices are controlled with the help of small software called a device driver.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Print controlling:
The operating system also controls the printing function. If a user issues two print commands at a time, it does not mix data of these files and prints them separately.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

11th Bio Botany Guide Reproductive Morphology Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I

Choose the Right Answer: 

Question 1.
Vexillary aestivation is characteristic of the family
a. Fabaceae
b. Asteraceae
c. Solanaceae
d. Brassieaceae
Answer:
a. Fabaceae

Question 2.
Gynoecium with united carpels is termed as
a. Apocarpous
b. Multicarpellary
c. Syncarpous
d. None of the above
Answer:
c. Syncarpous

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Aggregate fruit develops from
a. Multicarpellary apocarpous ovary
b. Multicarpellary syncarpous ovary
c. Multicarpellary ovary
d. Whole Inflorescence
Answer:
a. multicarpellary apocarpous ovary

Question 4.
In an inflorescence where flowers are borne laterally in an aeropetal succession, the position of the youngest floral bud shall be
a. Proximal
b. distal
c. Intercalary
d. Anywhere
Answer:
a. Proximal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
A true fruit is the one where
a. only ovary of the flower develops into fruit.
b. ovary and caly x of the flower develops into fruit.
c. ovary, caly x, and thalamus of the flower develops into fruit.
d. All floral whorls of the flower develops is to fruit.
Answer:
a.only ovary of the flower develops into the fruit

Question 6.
Find out the floral formula for a besexual flower with bract, regular, pentamerous, distinct caly x and corolla , superior ovary without bracteole.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 1

Question 7.
Giving the technical terms for the following.
a. A sterile stamen …………………..
b. Stamens are united in one bunch …………….
c. Stamens attached to the petals ……………….
Answer:
a. staminode
b. monodelphous
c. Epipetalous (petalostemonous)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 8.
Explain different types of placentation with example
Answer:
Marginal:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 2
It is with the plaentae along the marging of a unicarpellate ovary.
Example-Fabaceae.

Axile:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 3
The placentae arises from the column in a compound ovary with septa.
Example-Hibiscus, tomato lemon

Superficial:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 4

Ovules arise from the surfae of the septa.
Example: Nymphaeceae

Parietal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 5

It is the placentae on the ovary walls or upon intruding partitions of a unilocular, compound Ovary.
Example: Mustard, Argemone, cucumber.

Free-central:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 6

It is with the placentae along the column in a compound ovary without septa.
Example: Caryophyllaceae, Dianthus, Primrose

Basal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 7

It is the placenta at the base of the ovary.
Example: Sunflower (asrteraceae) Marigold.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 9.
Differences between aggregate fruit with multiple fruit.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 8

Question 10.
Explain different type of fleshy fruit with suitable example
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 9
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 10

Part II

11th Bio Botany Guide Reproductive Morphology Additional Important Questions and Answers

Choose the Right Answer:

Question 1.
Placentation in tomato and lemon is …………….
(a) parietal
(b) marginal
(c) free – central
(d) axile
Answer:
(d) axile

Question 2.
This is not a racemose Inflorescence
a. Spite
b. Catkin
c. Spadix
d. Cauliflower
Answer:
d.Cauliflower

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Geocarpic fruits are seen in …………… .
(a) carrot
(b) groundnut
(c) radish
(d) turnip
Answer:
(b) groundnut

Question 4.
Pendulose spikes occur in
a. Piper nigrum
b. Dry za sativa
c. Tridax sp
d. Zeamays
Answer:
a. Piper nigrum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
When the calyx is coloured and showy, it is called …………… .
(a) petaloid
(b) sepaloid
(c) bract
(d) spathe
Answer:
(a) petaloid

Question 6.
Parietal placentation occurs in
a. Hibiscus
b. Nymphaeaceae
c. Cucumber
d. Fabaceae
Answer:
c. Cucumber

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 7.
Trace the correct F.D of Jxora coccinea

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 11
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 12

Question 8.
In Theobroma cocoa, the inflorescence arise from …………… .
(a) terminal shoot
(b) axillary part
(c) trunk of plant
(d) leaf node
Answer:
(c) trunk of plant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 9.
An example for a Pseudo fruit
a. Apple
b. Tomato
c. Pumpkin
d. Mango
Answer:
a. Apple

Question 10.
The fruit type intermediate between dehiscent and indehiscent is known as
a. Regma
b. Samara
c. Schizocarpic
d. Nut
Answer:
c. Schizocarpic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 11.
Thyrsus is a type of …………… inflorescence.
(a) raceme
(b) cyme
(c) mixed
(d) special
Answer:
(c) mixed

Question 12.
Br, Ebrl, O7 p3+3 A(3) Go – is
a. This F.D of male flower of musa
b. The F.D of crotalaria juncea
c. The F.D. of male flower of phyllanthus amaras
d. The F.D of male flower of cocos nucifera
Answer:
c.The F.D of male flower of phyllnthus amaras.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 13.
Calyz is distinctly leaf-like, large often orange or white coloured as in mussenda it is known as
a. Campanulate sepals
b. Tubular sepals
c. Petaloid sepals
d. Sepaloid petals
Answer:
c. Petaloid sepals

Question 14.
If unisexual and bisexual flowers are seen in same plant then the plant is said to be …………… .
(a) polyphyllous
(b) polygamous
(c) hermaphroditic
(d) dioecious
Answer:
(b) polygamous

III. Match the following

Question 1.
(I) Spathe – A) Hibiscus sp
(II) Spikelet – B) Musa sp
(III) Epicaly – C) Paddy
(IV) Pislillate flower – D) Cocas Nucifera
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 13
Answer:
b. D-C-A-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 2.
(I) Epipetalous – A) G(2)
(II) Monoadeiphous – B) P(5)
(III) Inferior Ovary – C) A(a)
(IV) Gamophyllous – D) C(5)A5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 14
Answer:
a. D-C-A-B

Question 3.
(I) Catkin – A) Cauliflower
(Il) Corymb – B) Mangifera indica
(III) Panicle – C) Coriandrumsatiuum
(IV) Umbel – C) Coriandrumsatiuum
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 15
Answer:
b. D-C-B-A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 4.
(I) A single female flower surrounded by a group of male – A) Coenanthum flowers-enclosed in an involucre
(II) Circular disclike fleshy open receptacle bearing – B) Hypanthodium pistillate at the centre & staminate flowers at periphery}
(III) Receptacle hollow male flowers towards ostiole female – C) Polychasialcyme and neutral in the middle
(IV) Central axis ends in a flower lateral axis branches repeatedly – D) cyathium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 16
Answer:
b. D-A-B-C

Question 5.
(I) Persistent calyx – A) Calyx falls after the opening of a flower
(II) Deciduous calyx – B) Continue to grow with fruit and encloses it completely or partially
(III) Caduceus calyx – C) Calyx continues to be along with fruit forms a cup
(VI) Accresent calyx – D) Calyx falls during the early development stage of the flower
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 17
Answer:
C. C-A-D-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

IV. Choose the wrong pair

Question 1.
a. Follicle – Calotropis
b. Silicula – Capsella
c. Loculicidal capsule – Lady’s finger
d. Legume – Castor castor
Answer:
d. Legume

Question 2.
a. Raceme – Crotalaria
b. Cyme – Cyathium
c. Special type – Hypanthodium
d. Mixed type – Thyssus
Answer:
b. Cyme – Cyathium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
a. Monoecious – Coconut
b. Dioecious – Musa
c. Polygamous – Mangifera
d. Bisexual – Brinjal
Answer:
b. Dioecius- Musa

V. Fill up the tabulation with the right answer.

Question 1.

ConditionExplanationExample
1. Apostemonous__________________Cassia
2. PolyadelphonsFilaments connate into many bundles__________________
3. __________________Stamens adnate to petalsDatura
Syngenesious__________________Asteraceae

Answer:
1. Stamens distinct do not fuse with other parts
2. Citrus
3. Epipetalous
4. Anthers connate, filaments free

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 2.

Attachment of AntherDescriptionExample
1. Basiifixed………………….Datura
2. ………………….The apex of filament is attached to the dorsal side of the antherHibiscus
3. VersatileThe filament is attached to the anther at the midpoint ……………..
4. …………..The filament is continued from the base to the apexRanunculus

Answer:
1. Base of another is attached to the tip of the filament
2. Dorsifixed
3. Grasses
4. Adnate

VI. Choose the wrong pair

Question 1.
1. Ripened ovary – Seed
2. Ovary wall – Testa & tegmen
3. Ferlised ovule – Seed
4. Integuments of – Pericarp ovule
Answer:
3. Ferlized ovule – Seed

Question 2.
1. Cremocarp – groundnut
2. Carcerulus – coriander
3. Lomentum – abutilon
4. Regma – castor
Answer:
4. Regma – castor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
1. Caryopsis – paddy
2. Cypsela – coriander
3. Cremocarp – groundut
4. Lomentum – sunflower
Answer:
1. Caryopsis – paddy

VII. Identify the diagram & Label it correctly

Question 1.
Cymose inflorescen or simple dichasium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 19
Answer:
Cymose inflorescen or simple dichasium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 19
A-Bract
B-Old flower
C-Young flower

Question 2.
This is Papilionaceous Corolla
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 20
Answer:
This is Papilionaceous Corolla
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 20

A-Standard petal or corolla
B-Wing petals or alae
C-Keel petals or camia

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
The given diagram is spadix inflorescence
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 21
Answer:
The given diagram is spadix inflorescene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 21
A-Central axis
B- Female flower
C- Male flower

Question 4.
The given diagram is verticillaster
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 22
Answer:
The given diagram is verticillaster
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 22
A-Central axis
B-Monocharial scorpioid lateral branches
C-Blder flowers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
The diagram represents the tetradynamous condition of stamen
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 23
Answer:
The diagram represents the tetradynamous condition of stamen
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 23

A-4 long stamens
B-2 long stamens

VIII. Find out the true or false

Question 1.
(i) Asymmetric flowers cannot be divided into equal halves in any plane
(ii) The calyx of tridax is modified into a tubular structure
(iii) Heterostemonous stamens, have different lengths in the same flower
(iv) Hypanthium is a fleshy elevated stamina disk which is nectariferous in nature.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 24
Answer:
a. True – False – True – True

Question 2.
(i) Aeswation is the arrangement of sepals and petals in the flower when it open
(ii) Lodicule is the reduced scale-like perianth in the members of Poaceae
(iii) The walls of the ovary and septa form a cavity called locule
(iv) The branch that bears the flower is called the parental axis.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 25
Answer:
c. False – True – True – False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

IX. In the following diagram what are the parts.

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 26
Answer:
c. Peduncle – Involucre – Female flower – Male flower

X. Write down the edible parts of the following.

Question 1.

  1. Apple …….?
  2. Coconut …….?
  3. Jack fruit ……?
  4. Mango ……?
  5. Tomato ……?
  6. Orange …….?
  7. Pomegranate ……..?

Answer:

  1. Thalamus
  2. Oily endosperm
  3. Perianth
  4. Fleshy juicy mesocarp
  5. Epi, meso, and endocarp i.e (pericarp)
  6. Juicy hairs
  7. Testa of seed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

XI. Read the following Assertion and Reason & Find the correct answer.

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Fruits are the products of pollination and fertilization
Reason (R): All floral whorls of a flower develop into a fruit
(a) A and R are correct. R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining Assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is wrong

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Homochlamydeous condition is prevalent in monocot
Reason (R) : Undifferentiated calyx and corolla is known as perianth
(a) A and R are correct and R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining Assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
(a) A and R are correct and R is explaining A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Almost all flowers are hermaphrodite
Reason (R): Male and female sex organs do not occur in the same flower
(a) A and R are correct R is explaining A
(b) A and R are correct but R is not explaining assertion
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining assertion
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is wrong

XII. Fill up the blanks by giving technical terms for the following.

Question 1.
a) The study of fruits …….
Answer:
Pomology

b) lkebana is an act of ……….
Answer:
Flower arrangement

c) The botanical name of Saffron flower ……………
Answer:
Crocus Sativum

d) The flower grows once in 12 years …………
Answer:
Kurinji (Strobilanthus kunthranus)

e) World’s largest fruit is …………………
Answer:
Lodoicea maldivica

f) King Herod’s palace, near dead sea, scientist have got a seed viable for …………. years
Answer:
20,000 years

g) The longest and largest inflorescence of any flowering plant is ………………
Answer:
Corypha umbraculifera (cudai palm)

h) The largest single flower is known sofae is ………………
Answer:
Rafflesia arnoldi

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Give very short answers – 2 Marks

Question 1.
How will you define inflorescence?
Answer:
An inflorescence is a group of flowers arising from a branched or unbranched axis with a definite pattern.

Question 2.
Distinguish between Bract and Bracteole.
Answer:

Bract

Bracteole

  • Bract is that scale-like or structure leaf-like from which arises a flower
  • The presence of bract can be denoted as Bracteate its absence known as a bracteole
  • It is the scale-like or leaf-like structures seen on the pedicel of the flower just above the Bract.
  • The presence of bracteole in a flower is known as Bractolate, if it is absent it is known as Bracteolate

Question 3.
Distinguish between the Posterior and Anterior sides of a flower.
Answer:

Posterior side

Anterior side

The side of the flower facing the mother axis is called the Posterior side.
It is also known the part towards the plan
The side of the flower facing away from the mother axis is called the anterior side.
It is the part away from the plant.

Question 4.
Distinguish between Superior and Inferior Ovary.
Answer:

Superior Ovary

Inferior Ovary

It is the attachment of ovary relative to other floral parts – if the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary, e.g Hibiscus, MangiferaIf in the ovary the sepals petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary it is called Inferior.
e.g Ixora or Musa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 5.
What is a sessile flower?
Answer:
A flower without a pedicel or stalk is said to be a sessile flower.

Question 6.
What is the use of Pappus?
Answer:
Pappus is the hair-like structures – (modification of calyx)
Pappus occur in Asteraceaemembers – They help in the dispersal of fruits.

Question 7.
Write the units of (a) Perianth and (b) Calyx.
Answer:
The units of (a) Perianth and (b) Calyx:

  1. Perianth – tepals and
  2. Calyx – sepals

Question 8.
Distinguish between Apocarpous & Syncarpous.
Answer:

Apocarpous

Syncarpous

A pistil containing two or more distinct carpels is known as apocarpous condition e.g AnnonaA pistil containing two or more carpels which write or cannot-it is known as a syncarpous condition, e.g citus, tomato

Question 9.
Define a Carpel & Locule.
Answer:

Carpel

Locule

Components of gynoecium usually made of one or more carples they may be distinct or cannot Usually no. of carpel equals the no.of loculeThe walls of the ovary and (crosswall of ovary from a cavity called lcoule Usually no.of locules equals the no of carples exception Bicarpellary unilocular condition in Asteraceae

Question 10.
Draw the structure of the Anthophore.
Answer:
Intermodal extension between Calyx and Coralla
A – Androecium
B – Gynoecium
C – Corolla
D – Anthophore
E – Calyx
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 27

Question 11.
Classify racemose Inflorescence.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 28

Question 12.
Draw the structure of Hypanthodium and label the parts.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 29
A – Ostiole
B – Male flowers
D – Neutral flower gall flower
C – Female flower
E – Receptacle

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 13.
Compare Achene & Caryposis.
Answer:

Achene

Caryopsis

Indehiscent one-seeded fruit Develop from monocarpellary ovary Pericarp hard leathery-remain free from seed coat E.g. ClematisIndehiscent one-seeded fruit Develop from monocarpellary ovary Pericarp fused with seed coat E.g. Paddy

Question 14.
Compare Legume and Follicle
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 30

Question 15.
Differentiate between Dicotyledonous seed and Monocotyledonous seed.
Answer:

Dicot

Monocot

Two cotyledons occur Usually cotyledons store food and become thick and fleshy nourishes seedling during early development E.g.PeaOnly one cotyledon occur The endosperm persistent and nourishes the seedling during early development E.g. Castor

Question 16.
Differentiate between Albuminous and Non-albuminous seed.
Answer:

Albuminous seed

Non Albuminous seed

The cotyledons are then membranous and mature seeds have endosperm persistent and nourishes the seedling during its early development. Eg. Castor, SunflowerFood is stored in cotyledons and mature seeds are without endosperm.
Eg. Pea, Groundnut

Give Short Answers – 3 Marks

Question 1.
Differentiate between Racemose and Cymose Inflorescence.
Answer:

Characters

Racemose

Cymose

1. Main axisUnlimited growthLimited growth
2. Arrangement of flowersAcropetal successionBasipetal succession
3. OpeningCentripetalCentrifugal
4. Oldest flowerAt the baseAt the top

Question 2.
What is meant by Salver shaped or Hypocrateriform corolla. Give Eg.
Answer:
Petals of a flower fused to form a long narrow tube with spreading limbs are called salver-shaped or hypocrateriform corolla.
E.g. Ixora, Catharanthus sp.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology

Question 3.
Differentiate between Corymbose and Umbellate inflorescence by drawing diagrams.
Answer:

Question 4.
Why do we call Thyrsus as Raceme of Cymes?
Answer:
a. The main axis is indefinite growth like raceme
b. But it bears pedicellate cymes on either side laterally. E.g. Ocimum sanctum.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 32

Question 5.
Differentiate between Cyathium and Coenanthium.
Answer:

Cyathium

Coenanthium

A single female flower surrounded by many male flowers enclosed by a common involucre Flowers are naked-Aclamydeous Extrafloral nectary is present in involucre E.g. EuphorbiaCircular disc-like fleshy open receptacle bearing many pistillate or female flowers at the center surrounded by many male or staminate flowers at the periphery. Eg. Dorsenia

Question 6.
Differentiate between Homogamous head & Heterogamous head inflorescence.
Answer:

Homogamous Head

Heterogamous Head

Only one kind of florets 2 Types Has only tongue florets- E.g. Launaea Has only tube florets – E.g. VernoruaIt has 2 types of florets -Tongue of ray, Tube of Disc Tongue florets seen towards the periphery, and Tube florets located at the centre of the inflorescence E.g. Helianths & Tridax

Question 7.
Distinguish between the two types of Monochasial Cyme.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 33

Question 8.
Distinguish between Anthophore and Androphore, Gynophore and Gynandrophore
Answer:

Anthophore

AndrophoreGynophore

Gynandrophore

The intermodal elongation between calyx and corolla E.g. Silene conoideaThe internal elongation between coralla and Aroecium E.g. GrewiaThe internal elongation between Androecium and cynoecium E.g. CapparisThe unified internal elongation between corolla and Androecium as well as between Androecium and gynoecium E.g gynandropsis

Question 9.
Distinguish between Connation & Adnation
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 34

Question 10.
Differentiate between Didynamous and Tetradynamous condition of the stamen.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 35

Question 11.
Explain the various types of Schizocarpic fruit.
Answer:
This fruit type of intermediate between dehiscent and indehiscent fruit. The fruit instead of dehiscing rather splits into a number of segments, each containing one or more seeds. They are of the following types:

  1. Cremocarp: Fruit develops from bicarpellary, syncarpous, inferior ovary and splitting into two one-seeded segments known as mericarps. e.g., Coriander and Carrot.
  2. Carcerulus: Fruit develops from bicarpellary, syncarpous, superior ovary and splitting into four one-seeded segments known as nutlets, e.g., Leucas, Ocimum and Abutilon.
  3. Lomentum: The fruit is derived from monocarpellary, unilocular ovary. A leguminous fruit, constricted between the seeds to form a number of one seeded compartments that separate at maturity, e.g., Desmodium, Arachis and Mimosa.
  4. Regma: They develop from tricarpellary, syncarpous, superior, trilocular ovary and splits into one-seeded cocci which remain attached to carpophore, e.g., Ricinus and Geranium.

Question 12.
Identify the plant & Write down the floral formula of the given floral diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 36

Question 13.
Draw the floral diagram of Ixora Coccinea flower and write down floral formula.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 37

Question 14.
Classify the anthers based on their mode of attachment.
Answer:
The anthers based on their mode of attachment:

  1. Basifixed: (Innate) Base of anther is attached to the tip of filament, e.g., Brassica, Datura
  2. Dorsifixed: Apex of filament is attached to the dorsal side of the anther, e.g. Citrus, Hibiscus
  3. Versatile: Filament is attached to the anther at midpoint, e.g., Grasses
  4. Adnate: Filament is continued from the base to the apex of anther, e.g. Verbena, Ranunculus, Nelumbo.

Essay Questions – 5 Marks

Question 1.
Distinguish between Monoecious – Dioecious &Polygamous.
Answer:

MonoeciousDioeciousPolygamous
a.One house i.e male and female flowers present in the same flower . E.g. CoconutTwo house i.e male and and female flowers present on separate plants
E.g. Papaya
Here male flowers(staminate) female flowers (pistillate) & bisexual flowers occur in a single plant E.g. Mangifera

Question 2.
List out the significance of fruits.
Answer:
The significance of fruits:

  1. Edible part of the fruit is a source of food, energy for animals.
  2. They are source of many chemicals like sugar, pectin, organic acids, vitamins and minerals.
  3. The fruit protects the seeds from unfavourable climatic conditions and animals.
  4. Both fleshy and dry fruits help in the dispersal of seeds to distant places.
  5. In certain cases, fruit may provide nutrition to the developing seedling.
  6. Fruits provide source of medicine to humans.

Question 3.
What are the various parts of a typical flower.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 38

Question 4.
Detìne Aestivation Give an account of various types of aestivation?
Answer:

  • Aestivation: Arrangement of sepals and petals in the flowers bud.
  •  Types : There are 5 types
  •  Valvate : Margins of sepals and petals do not overlap but touch each other.
    Eg. Calyx — malvaceac inem bers .
  • Twisted or convolute or contorted: One margin of each petal or sepal overlapping on
    the other petal – Eg. Corolla of Malvaceae (china i-ose)
  • Imbricate : Sepals\ Petalsepals petaals – overlap irregularly one member of the whorl-
    exterior another interior other three one margin exterior other interior

3 types

  1.  Ascending-imbricate Eg. Cassia,
  2. . Descendingly-imbricate (vexillary aestivation) Eg. Clihoria,
  3. . Quincuncial- Eg. Guava
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 39

Question 5.
Define placentation and explain the various types of placentation with diagrams.
Answer:

Marginal:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 2
It is with the plaentae along the marging of a unicarpellate ovary.
Example-Fabaceae.
Axile:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 3
The placentae arises from the column in a compound ovary with septa.
Example-Hibiscus, tomato lemon

Superficial:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 4

Ovules arise from the surfae of the septa.
Example: Nymphaeceae

Parietal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 5

It is the placentae on the ovary walls or upon intruding partitions of a unilocular, compound Ovary.
Example: Mustard, Argemone, cucumber.

Free-central:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 6

It is with the placentae along the column in a compound ovary without septa.
Example: Caryophyllaceae, Dianthus, Primrose

Basal:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 7

It is the placenta at the base of the ovary.
Example: Sunflower (Asteraceae) Marigold.

Question 6.
Draw the floral diagram and flower of Cocos Nucifera and try to describe the flower with the floral diagram and floral formula.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 40
Male flower // Femle flower
Male flower of Cocos nucifera.

Male flower – Unisexual male Actinomorphic Bracteate, Bracteolate Incomplete
Perianth – 6 tepals – outer 3 and inner 3 two whorlsimbricate – apophyllous
Androecium – 6 stamens – outer 3 and inner 3 – free anther dithecous
Gynoecium – Absent – pistillode present

Female Flower – Unisexual female Actinomorphic Bracteole, ebracteolate, incomplete
Perianth – 6 tepals outer 3 -inner 3 outer valvate, inner imbricate apophyllous
Androecium – Absent staminode tricarpellary
Gynoecium – Ovary superior – tricarpellary trilocular syncarpous- ovules-Axile Placentation.

Question 7.
Describe the ovary types on the basis of its positive relative to other parts.
Answer:
The ovary can be divided into 3 types on this basis
Superior Ovary : (Flower Hypogynous)
It is the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the base of the ovary.

In feriror ovary : (Flower Epigynous)
It is the ovary with sepals, petals and stamens attached at the apex of the ovary.

Half inferior ovary : (Flower Perigynous) It is the ovary with sepals petals and stamens or hypanthium attached near the middle of the ovary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 41

Question 8.
Give an account of Dry Dehiscent fruits.
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 43

Question 9.
Give an account of dry indehiscent fruits.
Answer:

Type of fruitNature of ovarySpecial aspectsExample
1.AcheneMonocarpellary superior ovary ApocarpousApocarpous Fruit wall pericarp is free from seed coat.Clematis strawberry
2.CypselaBicarpellary inferior ovary syncarpousReduced scales Hairy or feathery – calyx lobes-PappusTridax helianthus
3.CaryopsisMonocarpellary superior ovaryFruit wall inseparably fused with seedOryza triticum
4.NutMulticarpellary syncarpous superior ovaryHard woody bony pericarpAnacardium
5.SamaraMonocarpellary superior ovaryPericarp (ovary wall) Develop into then wing-like structure – help in fruit dispersalPterocarpus
6.UtricleBicarpellary unilocular syncarpous superior ovaryPericarp loosely encloses the seed.Chenopodium.

Question 10.
Explain only the racemose type with the elongated main axis.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 42

Question 11.
Draw a chart depicting various types of Fruits.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 44

Question 12.
What is the significance of Seeds?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 45

Question 13.
Draw the tabulation showing various fruits & their edible part.
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 46
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 47
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 4 Reproductive Morphology 48

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

12th Physics Guide Recent Developments in Physics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I

TextBook Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
The particle size of ZnO material is 30 nm. Based on the dimension it is classified as
a) Bulk material
b) Nanomaterial
c) Soft material
d) Magnetic material
Answer:
b) Nanomaterial

Question 2.
Which one of the following is the natural nanomaterial.
a) Peacock feather
b) Peacock beak
c) Grain of sand
d) Skin of the Whale
Answer:
a) Peacock feather

Question 3.
The blue print for making ultra-durable synthetic material is mimicked from ________.
a) Lotus leaf
b) Morpho butterfly
c) Parrot fish
d) Peacock feather
Answer:
c) Parrot fish

Question 4.
The method of making nanomaterial by assembling the atoms is called ______.
a) Top down approach
b) Bottom up approach
c) Cross down approach
d) Diagonal approach
Answer:
b) Bottom up approach

Question 5.
“Sky wax” is an application of nano product in the field of ________.
a) Medicine
b) Textile
c) Sports
d) Automotive industry
Answer:
c) Sports

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
The materials used in Robotics are ________.
a) Aluminium and silver
b) Silver and gold
c) Copper and gold
d) Steel and aluminium
Answer:
d) Steel and aluminium

Question 7.
The alloys used for muscle wires in Robots are _______.
a) Shape memory alloys
b) Gold copper alloys
c) Gold silver alloys
d) Two-dimensional alloys
Answer:
a) Shape memory alloys

Question 8.
The technology used for stopping the brain from processing pain is ______.
a) Precision medicine
b) Wireless brain sensor
c) Virtual reality
d) Radiology
Answer:
c) Virtual reality

Question 9.
The particle which gives mass to protons and neutrons are _______.
a) Higgs particle
b) Einstein particle
c) Nanoparticle
d) Bulk particle
Answer:
a) Higgs particle

Question 10.
The gravitational waves were theoretically proposed by _______.
a) Conrad Rontgen
b) Marie Curie
c) Albert Einstein
d) Edward Purcell
Answer:
c) Albert Einstein

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
Distinguish between Nanoscience and Nanotechnology.
Answer:

NanoscienceNanotechnology
1. Nanoscience is the science of objects with a typical size of 1-100 nm.
Nano means one-billionth of a metre that is 10-9m.
Nanotechnology is a technology involving design, production.
2. If matter is divided into such small objects the mechanical, electrical, optical magnetic and other properties change.Characterization and application of nano structured materials.

Question 2.
What is the difference between Nano materials and Bulk materials?
Answer:

Nano MaterialsBulk Mateerials
1. Nano materials are particle that have their size in 1-100 nm range atleast in one dimension.Bulk materials are particle that have their size above lOOnm in all dimensions.
2. We cannot see particles of nanomaterials from the naked eye.We can see particle of most of the bulk materials from the naked eye.
3. The example of nanomaterials include nano zymes, titanium dioxide, nano particles, graphene, etc.The example of bulk materials include plaster sand, gravel, cement, ore, slag, salts, etc.

Question 3.
Give any two examples for “Nano” in nature.
Answer:
1.  Single-strand DNA:
A single strand of DNA, the building block of all living things, is about three nanometers wide.

2. Morpho Butterfly:
The scales on the wings of a morpho butterfly contain nanostructures that change the way light waves interact with each other, giving the wings brilliant metallic blue and green hues. Mimic in laboratories – Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles with which the materials are made.

Question 4.
Mention any two advantages and disadvantages of Robotics.
Answer:
Advantage:

  1. The robots are much cheaper than humans.
  2. Robots never get tired like humans.
  3. Stronger and faster than humans.

Disadvantage:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. They lack empathy and hence create an emotionless workplace.
  3. Unemployment problem will increase.

Question 5.
Why steel is preferred in making Robots?
Answer:
Steel is several times stronger. In any case, because of the inherent strength of metal, robot bodies are made using a sheet, bar, rod, channel, and other shapes.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
What are black holes?
Answer:

  1. Black holes are the end-stage of stars which are the highly dense massive objects. Its mass ranges from 20 times mass of the sun to 1 million times mass of the sun.
  2. It has very strong gravitational force such that no particle or even light can escape from it.
  3. The existence of black holes is studied when the stars orbiting the black hole behave differently from the other stars. Every galaxy has a black hole at its center.

Question 7.
What are sub atomic particles?
Answer:

  1. The three main subatomic particles that form an atom are protons, neutrons, and electrons.
  2. Subatomic particles are particles that are smaller than the atom, proton and neutron are made up of quarks which is interact through gluons.
  3. A subatomic particle having two types of particles, they are elementary particles and composite particles.

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Discuss the applications of Nanomaterials in various fields.
Answer:

(i) Automotive industry:

  • Lightweight construction
  • Painting (fillers, base coat, clear coat)
  • Catalysts
  • Tires (fillers)
  • Sensors
  • Coatings for window screen and car bodies

(ii) Chemical industry:

  • Fillers for paint systems
  • Coating systems based on nanocomposites
  • Impregnation of papers
  • Switchable adhesives
  • Magnetic fluids

(iii) Engineering

  • Wear protection for tools and machines (anti blocking coatings, scratch resistant coatings on plastic parts, etc.)
  • Lubricant – free bearings

(iv) Electronic industry

  • Data memory
  • Displays
  • Laser diodes
  • Glass fibres
  • Optical switches
  • Filters (IR-blocking)
  • Conductive, antistatic coatings

(v) Construction:

  • Construction materials
  • Thermal insulation
  • Flame retardants
  • Surface – functionalised building materials for wood, floors, stone, facades, tiles, roof tiles, etc.
  • Facade coatings
  • Groove mortar

(vi) Medicine:

  • Drug delivery systems
  • Contrast medium
  • Prostheses and implants
  • Agents in cancer therapy
  • Active agents
  • Medical rapid tests
  • Antimicrobial agents and coatings

(vii) Textile / fabrics / non – wovens:

  • Surface – processed textiles
  • Smart clothes

(viii) Energy:

  • Fuel cells
  • Solar cells
  • Batteries
  • Capacitors

(ix) Cosmetics:

  • Sun protection
  • Lipsticks
  • Skin creams
  • Tooth paste

(x) Food and drinks:

  • Package materials
  • Additives
  • Storage life sensors
  • Clarification of fruit juices

(xi) Household:

  • Ceramic coatings for irons
  • Odors catalyst
  • Cleaner for glass, ceramic, floor, windows

(xii) Sports / outdoor:

  • Ski wax
  • Antifogging of glasses/goggles
  • Antifouling coatings for ships/boats
  • Reinforced tennis rackets and balls.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 2.
What are the possible harmful effects of the usage of Nanoparticles? Why?
Answer:

  1. The research on the harmful impact of the application of nanotechnology is also equally important and fast developing.
  2. The major concern here is that the nanoparticles have the dimensions same as biological molecules such as protein.
  3. They may easily get absorbed onto the surface of living organisms and they might enter the tissues and fluids of the body.
  4. The interaction with living systems is also affected by the dimensions of the nanoparticles.
  5. For instance, nanoparticles of a few nanometers size may reach well inside biomolecules.
  6. It is also possible for the inhaled nanoparticles to reach the blood to reach other sites such as the liver, heart, or blood cells.
  7. Researchers are trying to understand the response of living organisms to the presence of nanoparticles of varying size, shape, chemical composition, and surface characteristics.

Question 3.
Discuss the functions of key components in Robots?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics 1
Power conversion unit:
Robots are powered by batteries, solar power, and hydraulics.

Actuators:

  1. Converts energy into movement.
  2. The majority of the actuators produce rotational (or) linear motion.

Most robots are composed of 3 main parts.

The Controller:

  1. This is also known as the “brain” which is run by a computer program.
  2. It gives commands for the moving parts to perform the job.

Most robots are composed of 3 main parts.

Mechanical parts:

  1. Motors
  2. Pistons
  3. Grippers
  4. Wheels and gears that make the robot move, grab, turn and lift.

Sensors:

  1. To tell the robot about its surroundings.
  2. It helps to determine the sizes and shapes of the objects around, the distance between the objects, and the directions as well.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 4.
Elaborate any two types of Robots with relevant examples.
Answer:
(i) Human-Robot: Certain robots are made to resemble humans in appearance and replicate human activities like walking, lifting, and sensing, etc.

  1. Power conversion unit: Robots are powered by batteries, solar power, and hydraulics.
  2. Actuators: Converts energy into movement. The majority of the actuators produce rotational or linear motion.
  3. Electric motors: They are used to actuate the parts of the robots like wheels, arms, fingers,
    legs, sensors, camera, weapon systems etc. Different types of electric motors are used. The most often used ones are AC motor, Brushed DC motor, Brushless DC motor, Geared DC motor, etc.
  4. Pneumatic Air Muscles: They are devices that can contract and expand when air is pumped inside. It can replicate the function of a human muscle. The contract almost 40% when the air is sucked inside them.
  5. Muscle wires: They are thin strands of wire made of shape memory alloys. They can contract by 5% when an electric current is passed through them.
  6. Piezo Motors and Ultrasonic Motors: Basically, we use it for industrial robots.
  7. Sensors: Generally used in task environments as it provides information of real-time knowledge.
  8. Robot locomotion: Provides the types of movements to a robot.
    The different types are:

    • Legged
    • Wheeled
    • Combination of Legged and Wheeled Locomotion
    • Tracked slip/skid.

(ii) Industrial Robots:
Six main types of industrial robots:

  1. Cartesian
  2. SCARA (Selective Compliance Assembly Robot Arm)
  3. Cylindrical
  4. Delta
  5.  Polar
  6. Vertically articulated

Six-axis robots are ideal for:

  1. Arc Welding
  2. Spot Welding
  3. Material Handling
  4. Machine Tending
  5. Other Applications

Question 5.
Comment on the recent advancement in medical diagnosis and therapy.
Answer:
The recent advancement in medical diagnosis and therapy:

  1. Virtual reality
  2. Precision medicine
  3. Health wearables
  4. Artificial organs
  5.  3 – D printing
  6. Wireless brain sensors
  7. Robotic surgery
  8. Smart inhalers

1. Virtual reality:
Medical virtual reality is effectively used to stop the brain from processing pain and cure soreness in the hospitalized patients. Virtual reality has enhanced surgeries by the use of 3D models by surgeons to plan operations. It helps in the treatment of Autism, Memory loss, and Mental illness.

2. Precision medicine:
Precision medicine is an emerging approach for disease treatment and prevention that takes into account individual variability in genes, environment, and lifestyle for each person. In this medical model, it is possible to customise healthcare, with medical decisions, treatments, practices, or products which are tailored to the individual patient.

3. Health wearables:
A health wearable is a device used for tracking a wearer’s vital signs or health and fitness-related data, location, etc. Medical wearables with artificial intelligence and big data provide an added value to healthcare with a focus on diagnosis, treatment, patient monitoring, and prevention.

Note Big Data: Extremely large data sets that may be analysed computationally to reveal patterns, trends, and associations, especially relating to human behavior and interactions.

4. Artificial organs:
An artificial organ is an engineered device or tissue that is implanted or integrated into a human. It is possible to interface it with living tissue or to replace a natural organ. It duplicates or augments a specific function or functions of human organs so that the patient may return to normal life as soon as possible.

5. 3D printing:
Advanced 3D printer systems and materials assist physicians in a range of operations in the medical field from audiology, dentistry, orthopedics, and other applications.

6. Wireless brain sensors:
Wireless brain sensors monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are
absorbed by the body. Hence there is no need for surgery to remove these devices.

7. Robotic surgery:
Robotic surgery is a type of surgical procedure that is done using robotic systems. Robotically-assisted surgery helps to overcome the limitations of pre – existing minimally invasive surgical procedures and to enhance the capabilities of surgeons performing open
surgery.

8. Smart inhalers:
Inhalers are the main treatment option for asthma. Smart inhalers are designed with health systems and patients in mind so that they can offer maximum benefit. Smart inhalers use Bluetooth technology to detect inhaler use, remind patients when to take their medication, and gather data to help guide care.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Part – II:

12th Physics Guide Recent Developments in Physics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Match the following:

Question 1.

III
1. Moleculea. Located in the center of an atom
2. Nucleonb. Electrons revolving around the atomic nucleus
3. Atomc. Protons & Neutrons comprising the nucleus of an atom
4. Nucleusd. Composed of two (or) more

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. b
  4. a

Question 2.

III
1. Geroge Devola. Audiology
2. Nanob. No need surgery
3. Wireless brain sensorsc. One billionth of a meter (109 m)
4. 3D Printingd. Unimate

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. b
  4. a

Question 3.

III
1. Higgs Particlea. Slavic word
2. Albert Einsteinb. Mass of particle
3. Black Holesc.Gravitational waves
4. Robotd. End stage of stars

Answer:

  1. b
  2. c
  3. d
  4. a

Question 4.

III
1. Stephen Hawkinga. Rossum universal robots
2. Einstein’s theoryb. Twin mars rovers
3. Karl Capekc. Field of black holes
4. Outer spaced. General relativity

Answer:

  1. c
  2. d
  3. a
  4. b

Question 5.

III
1. Inhalersa. Aluminium and steel
2. 3D Printingb. Mars pathfinder mission
3. Make robotsc. Dentistry
4. Outer Spaced. Asthma

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. a
  4. b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

II. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
_____ existed in nature long before scientists began studying them in laboratories.
Answer:
Nanoscale structures

Question 2.
_____ and _____ is the interdisciplinary area covering its applications in various fields.
Answer:
Nanoscience, technology

Question 3.
Chinese scientists have created the world’s first autonomous DNA robots to combat _______.
Answer:
cancer tumours

Question 4.
________ is the fundamental entity of matter.
Answer:
Atom

Question 5.
There are two ways of preparing the nanomaterials _____ and _____ approaches.
Answer:
top-down, bottom-up

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

III. Choose the odd man out:

Question 1.
The robotic system mainly consists of ________.
a) sensors
b) power supplies
c) blood cells
d) control system
Answer:
c) blood cells

Question 2.
The key components of a robot are _______.
a)Power conversion unit
b) Actuators
c) Electric motors
d) Muscle wires
e) Delta
f) Sensors
Answer:
e) Delta

Question 3.
Six main types of industrial robots are _______.
a) Cartesian
b) SCARA
c) Cylindrical
d) Delta
e) Polar
f) Ultrasonic motors
Answer:
f) Ultrasonic motors

Question 4.
The recent advancement in medical technology includes ________.
a) Artificial organs
b) Precision medicine
c) Virtual reality
d) Pool cleaning
e) 3D printing etc
Answer:
d) Pool cleaning

Question 5.
Household robots are used as _______.
a) floor cleaners
b) gutter cleaners
c) Pool cleaning
d) Investigation of the rocks
e) Lawn mowing
Answer:
d) Investigation of the rocks

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

IV. Find the correct pair:

Question 1.
a) SCARA – Spot welding
b) George Devol and – First robot Joseph Engalberger company
c) Found rocks and soils – Pool cleaning
d) Size less than 100 nm – Bulk solid
Answer:
b) George Devol and Joseph Engalberger – First robot company

Question 2.
a) Top-down approach – Plasma etching
b) Chemical Industry – Glass Fibres
c) Medicine – Active agents
d) Human-Robot – Machine Tending
Answer:
c) Medicine – Active agents

V. Find the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) 3D Printing – Audiology
b) Karel Capek – Rossum universal robots
c) Inhalers – Asthma
d) Higgs particle – End stage of stars
Answer:
d) Higgs particle – End stage of stars

Question 2.
a) Higgs particles – God particles
b) Stephen Hawking – Field of Black holes
c) Molecule – Fundamental entity of matter
d) George Devol – Unimate
Answer:
c) Molecule – Fundamental entity of matter

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VI. Choose the incorrect statement:

Question 1.
Statement 1: Nanotechnology is a technology involving the design, production, characterization, and applications of nanostructured materials.
Statement 2: Nanoparticles of a few micrometers size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.
a) statement 1
b) statement 2
c) statement 1 and 2
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Statement 2:
Correct Sentence:
Nanoparticles of a few nanometer-size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.

Question 2.
a) Statement 1: Five major fields of robotics are human-robot interface, mobility, manipulation, programming, and sensors.
b) Statement 2: Aluminum is a softer metal and is, therefore, easier to work with.
c) Statement 3: Industrial robots are used for exploring stars, planets, etc.
d) Statement 4: The robotic system mainly consists of sensors, power supplies, control systems, manipulators and
necessary software.
Answer:
c) Statement 3
Correct Sentence:
Industrial robots are used for welding, cutting, robotic water jet cutting, lifting, etc.

Question 3.
a) Statement 1: Accelerated mass emits gravitational force which is very week.
b) Statement 2: Black holes are the strongest source of gravitational waves.
c) Statement 3: Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe.
Answer:
a) Statement 1:
Correct Sentence:
Accelerated mass emits gravitational wave which is very week.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VII. Choose the correct statement:

Question 1.
a) Statement 1: Human is a mechanical device.
b) Statement 2: Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.
c) Statement 3: Top up and Bottom down are the two ways to preparing the nanomaterials.
d) Statement 4: It is possible to deliver a drug directly to a specific cell in the body by designing the surface of bulk particles.
Answer:
b) Statement 2: Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.

Question 2.
a) Statement 1: Manipulation of colours is found in laboratories by Morpho butterfly in nature.
b) Statement 2: Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors from peacock feathers in nature.
c) Statement 3: Water repellent nano paints are made from a lotus leaf surface idea.
d) Statement 4: All statements are correct.
Answer:
d) Statement 4: All statements are correct

Question 3.
Nanomaterial-based products in different fields.
a) Statement 1: Lightweight construction in medicine.
b) Statement 2: Displays nanomaterial application in the engineering field.
c) Statement 3: Antimicrobial agents and coating in the medical field.
d) Statement 4: None of these
Answer:
c) Statement 3: Antimicrobial agents and coating in the medical field.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VIII. Assertion and Reason:

a) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is a correct explanation for the assertion.
b) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is not a correct explanation for the assertion.
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct.

Question 1.
Assertion (A):
Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.
Reason (R):
It is also possible for the inhaled nanoparticles to reach the blood, other sites as the liver, heart.
Answer:
a) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is a correct explanation for the assertion.

Question 2.
Assertion (A):
A drug delivery system is a medical application of a nano-based product.
Reason (R):
The mechanical parts of Robotics are motors, pistons, grippers, wheels, and gears.
Answer:
b) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is not a correct explanation for the assertion.

Question 3.
Assertion (A):
Human robots replicate human activities like walking, lifting, and sensing, etc.
Reason (R):
Electric motors are not used in robots.
Answer:
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.

Question 4.
Assertion (A):
Face recognition is a natural intelligence of robots.
Reason (R):
Robot can translate words from one language to another.
Answer:
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

IX. Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
An automatic apparatus or device that performs functions ordinarily ascribed to human or operate with what appears to be almost human intelligence is called ……………..
(a) Robot
(b) Human
(c) Animals
(d) Reptiles.
Answer:
(a) Robot.

Question 2.
If the particle of a solid is of size less than 100 nm, it is said to be a .
a) nano solid
b) bulk solid
c) nano & bulk solids
d) None of these
Answer:
a) nano solid

Question 3.
The basic components of the robot are ……………..
(a) mechanical linkage
(b) sensors and controllers
(c) user interface and power conversion unit
(d) All the above.
Answer:
(d) All the above.

Question 4.
Nano means ________.
a) 10-33 m
b) 10-6 m
c) 10-9 m
d) 10-12 m
Answer:
c) 10-9 m

Question 5.
_______ and _______ are the two important phenomena that govern nano properties.
a) Quantum confinement effects
b) Surface effects
c) Quantum confinement (or) Surface light
d) Quantum confinement effect and Surface confinement effects
Answer:
d) Quantum confinement effect and Surface confinement effects

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
Which of the following atoms do not move from each other ……………..
(a) Shape memory alloys
(b) Nanomaterials
(c) Dielectrics
(d) Static materials.
Answer:
(b) Nanomaterials

Question 7.
A health wearable is a device used for ________.
a) health and fitness-related data, location, etc.
b) to replace a natural organ
c) (a) and (b)
d) (a) or (b)
Answer:
a) health and fitness-related data, location, etc.

Question 8.
Atom is made up of ________.
a) electrons
b) protons
c) neutrons
d) above all
Answer:
d) above all

Question 9.
For nanometers whose diameters less than …………….are used for welding purposes.
(a) 10 nm
(b) 20 nm
(c) 30 nm
(d) 40 nm.
Answer:
(a) 10 nm

Question 10.
The Strongest source of gravitational waves is _______.
a) black holes
b) accelerated mass
c) sun
d) stars
Answer:
a) black holes

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 11.
This is the black hole at the centre of the milky way galaxy.
a) Sagittarius A*
b) Sagittarius B*
c) Sagittarius C*
d) Sagittarius D*
Answer:
a) Sagittarius A*

Question 12.
Who worked in the field of black holes.
a) Marie curie
b) Stephen Hawking
c) Conrad Rontgen
d) Edward Purcell
Answer:
b) Stephen Hawking

Question 13.
Who is the father of the modem robotics industry formed the world’s first robotic company in 1956 ……………..
(a) Joliot
(b) Cormark
(c) Engelberger
(d) Edward purcell.
Answer:
(c) Engelberger

Question 14.
Slavic word robota means ________.
a) labour
b) work
c) labour (or) work
d) None of these
Answer:
c) labour (or) work

Question 15.
These robots are used for vacuum cleaners, floor cleaners, pool cleaning, etc.,
a) Household robots
b) Industrial robots
c) Space robots
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Household robots

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 16.
Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors.
a) Morpho butterfly
b) Peacock feathers
c) DNA
d) Parrotfish
Answer:
b) Peacock feathers

Question 17.
Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles from this idea is _______.
a) Morpho butterfly
b) Peacock feathers
c) Parrotfish
d) Lotus leaf surface
Answer:
a) Morpho butterfly

Question 18.
The phenomenon of artificial radioactivity was invented by ……………..
(a) Joliot and Irene curie
(b) Felix Bloch and Edward Purcell
(c ) Connick and Hounsfield
(d) Wilhelm Conrad – Rontgen.
Answer:
(a) Joliot and Irene curie

Question 19.
Bottom up approach example is _______.
a) ball milling
b) sol-gel
c) lithography
d) plasma etching
Answer:
d) plasma etching

Question 20.
Coatings for wind-screen and car bodies
a) Chemical industry
b) Electronic industry
c) Automotive industry
d) Medicine
Answer:
c) Automotive industry

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 21.
This is effectively used to stop the brain from processing pain and cure soreness in the hospitalized patients.
a) Virtual reality
b) Precision medicine
c) Health wearables
d) Artificial organs
Answer:
a) Virtual reality

Question 22.
This is an emerging approach for disease treatment.
a) Artificial organs
b) Health wearables
c) Precision medicine
d) Virtual reality
Answer:
c) Precision medicine

Question 23.
This is possible to interface it with living tissue (or) to replace a natural organ.
a) Precision medicine
b) Health wearables
c) Virtual reality
d) Artificial organs
Answer:
d) Artificial organs

Question 24.
This device used for tracking a wearer’s vital signs.
a) 3D printing
b) Health wearables
c) Artificial organs
d) Robotic surgery
Answer:
b) Health wearables

Question 25.
This monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are absorbed by the body.
a) 3D printing
b) Health wearables
c) wireless brain sensors
d) Robotic surgery
Answer:
c) wireless brain sensors

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 26.
Composed of two or more atoms.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
a) Molecule

Question 27.
Electrons revolving around the atomic nucleus.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
b) Atom

Question 28.
Composed of protons and neutrons located in the center of an atom.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
c) Nucleus

Question 29.
Protons and neutrons comprising the nucleus of an atom.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
d) Nucleon

Question 30.
Smart inhaler uses this technology to detect inhaler use.
a) system technology
b) Bluetooth technology
c) both (a) and (b)
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Bluetooth technology

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

X. Two mark questions:

Question 1.
What is physics?
Answer:
Physics is the basic building block for Science, Engineering, Technology, and Medicine.

Question 2.
What is Robotics?
Answer:
Robotics is an integrated study of mechanical engineering, electronic engineering, computer engineering, and science.

Question 3.
What are Robots?
Answer:
The robot is a mechanical device designed with electronic circuitry and programmed to perform a specific task.

Question 4.
What is meant by ‘Robot’? Write its uses?
Answer:
Robot is a mechanical device designed with electronic circuitry and programmed to perform a specific task. These automated machines are highly significant in this robotic era where they can take up the role of humans in certain dangerous environments that are hazardous to people like defusing bombs, finding survivors in unstable ruins, and exploring mines and shipwrecks.

Question 5.
Name main types of industrial robots.
Answer:
Six main types of industrial robots are,

  1. Cartesian
  2. SCARA
  3. Cylindrical
  4. Delta
  5. Polar
  6. Vertically articulated

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
Name the axis robots.
Answer:
Six-axis robots are ideal for

  1. Arc Welding
  2. Spot Welding
  3. Material Handling
  4. Machine Tending
  5. Other applications

Question 7.
What is the aim of artificial intelligence?
Answer:
The aim of artificial intelligence is to bring in human-like behavior in robots.

Question 8.
Define cosmology?
Answer:
Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe. It deals with the formation of stars, galaxy, etc.

Question 9.
What are the uses of outer space robots?
Answer:
In outer space, robots are used for exploring stars, planets, etc., investigation of the mineralogy of the rocks and soils on Mars, analysis of elements found in rocks and soils.

Question 10.
Name some outer space robots.
Answer:

  1. Mars Rovers of NASA
  2. Twin Mars Rovers
  3. Mars Pathfinder Mission

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 11.
What are the uses of household robots?
Answer:
Household robots are used as,

  1. Vacuum cleaners
  2. Floor cleaners
  3. Gutter cleaners
  4. Lawn mowing
  5. Pool cleaning
  6. To open and close doors

Question 12.
What are the developments in Nano-robots?
Answer:
Nano-robots are being developed to be in the bloodstream to perform small surgical procedures, to fight against bacteria, repairing individual cells in the body.

Question 13.
Define Particle physics.
Answer:
Particle physics deals with fundamental particles of nature. Protons and neutrons are made of quarks.

Question 14.
What is cosmology?
Answer:
Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe.

Question 15.
What is physics?
Answer:

  1. Physics is the basic building block for Science, Engineering, Technology and Medicine.
  2. Nanoscience is the science of objects with typical sizes of 1-100 nm.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 16.
What is Nano?
Answer:
Nano means one-billionth of a meter that is 10-9 m.

Question 17.
What is nano solid?
Answer:
If the particle of a solid is of size less than lOOnm, it is said to be a nano solid.

Question 18.
What is bulk solid?
Answer:
When the particle size exceeds 100 nm, it forms a bulk solid.

Question 19.
Name the two ways of preparing the nanomaterials.
Answer:

  • Top-down approaches
  • Bottom-up approaches

Question 20.
What are the major fields of robotics?
Answer:
Five major fields of robotics are

  1. Human-robot interface
  2. Mobility
  3. Manipulation
  4. Programming
  5. Sensors

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 21.
Is the accelerated mass emits gravitational waves?
Answer:
Yes, the accelerated mass emits gravitational waves which are very weak.

Question 22.
What is the important phenomena of nano properties?
Answer:
Quantum confinement effects and surface effects are the two important phenomena that govern nano properties.

Question 23.
Is the nano form of the material the same as its bulk counterpart?
Answer:
No, The nano form of the material shows strikingly different properties when compared to its bulk counterpart.

Question 24.
Can nanoparticles get absorbed?
Answer:
Yes, Nanoparticles can easily get absorbed onto the surface of living organisms and they might enter the tissues and fluids of the body.

Question 25.
What is the function of inhaled nanoparticles?
Answer:
The inhaled nanoparticles reach the blood and that may also reach other sites such as the liver, heart, and blood cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 26.
Can nanoparticles cross the cell membrane?
Answer:
Yes, nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.

Question 27.
Is the larger nanoparticles can reach inside the biomolecules?
Answer:

  1. The absorbing nature depends on the surface of the nanoparticle.
  2. Nanoparticles of a few nanometers size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.

Question 28.
What is Unimate?
Answer:
In 1954, George Devol invented the first digitally operated programmable robot called “Unimate”.

Question 29.
Write a short note on Human-Robot.
Answer:
Certain robots are made to resemble humans in appearance and replicate human activities like walking, lifting and sensing, etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

XI. Three mark questions:

Question 1.
List out the nanomaterial-based products in the automotive industry.
Answer:

  1. Lightweight construction
  2. Painting (fillers, base coat, clear coat)
  3. Catalysts
  4. Tires (fillers)
  5. Sensors
  6. Coatings for wind-screen and car bodies

Question 2.
Give five examples of nanomaterial-based products in the chemical industry.
Answer:

  1. Fillers for paint systems
  2. Coating systems based on nanocomposites
  3. Impregnation of papers
  4. Switchable adhesives
  5. Magnetic fluids

Question 3.
Write the application of nanomaterial-based products in construction.
Answer:

  1. Construction materials
  2. Thermal insulation
  3. Flame retardants
  4. Surface-functionalized building materials for wood, floors, stone, facades, tiles, roof tiles, etc.
  5. Facade coatings
  6. Groove mortar

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 4.
What are the applications of nanomaterial-based products in the following areas?
i) Textile
ii) Energy
iii) cosmetics
Answer:

Textile/fabrics/ non-wovensEnergyCosmetics
1. Surface Processed textiles
2. Smart clothes
1. Fuel cells
2. Solar cells
3. Batteries
4. Capacitors
1. Sun protection
2. Lipsticks
3. Skin creams
4. toothpaste

Question 5.
List the nanomaterial-based products in Engineering.
Answer:

  1. Wear protection for tools and machines (anti-blocking coatings, scratch-resistant coatings on plastic parts, etc.)
  2. Lubricant-free bearings.

Question 6.
Write about the top-down approach of nanomaterials synthesis.
Answer:
Top-down approach:

  • Nanomaterials are synthesised by breaking down bulk solids into nano sizes.
  • Ex: Ball milling, sol-gel, lithography.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 7.
What is bottom-up approach?
Answer:

  1. Nanomaterials are synthesised by assembling the atoms/molecules together.
  2. Selectively atoms are added to create structures.
  3. Example: Plasma etching and chemical vapour deposition.

Question 8.
Short note on nano in laboratories.
Answer:

  1. The nanostructures made in the laboratory mimic some of nature’s amazing nanostructures.
  2. As the nanostructures are so small, specialized methods are needed to manufacture objects in this size range.
  3. There are two ways of preparing the nanomaterials, top-down and bottom-up approaches.

Question 9.
Mention the uses of wireless brain sensors.
Answer:

  1. Wireless brain sensors monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are absorbed by the body.
  2. Hence there is no need for surgery to remove these devices.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 10.
What is robotic surgery?
Answer:

  1. Robotic surgery is a type of surgical procedure that is done using robotic systems.
  2. Robotically assisted surgery helps to overcome the limitations of pre-existing minimally-invasive surgical procedures and to enhance the capabilities of surgeons performing open surgery.

Question 11.
What do you know about smart inhalers?
Answer:

  1. Inhalers are the main treatment option for asthma.
  2. Smart inhalers are designed with health systems and patients in mind so that they can offer maximum benefit.
  3. Smart inhalers use BlueTooth technology to detect inhaler use, remind patients when to take their medication, and gather data to help guide care.

Question 12.
What is the role of physics in medical diagnosis?
Answer:

  1. Medical science very much revolves around physics principles.
  2. Medical instrumentation has widened the life span due to the technology integrated diagnosis and treatment of most of the diseases.
  3. This modernisation in all fields is possible due to the efficient application of fundamental physics.

Question 13.
What is gravitational waves? How are they produced?
Answer:

  1. Gravitational waves are the disturbances in the curvature of space-time and it travels with the speed of light.
  2. Any accelerated charge emits an electromagnetic wave. Any accelerated mass emits gravitational waves but these waves are very weak even for masses like earth. The strongest source of gravitational waves is black holes.
  3. The recent discoveries of gravitational waves are emitted by two black holes when they merge into a single black hole.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 14.
Can we completely replace humans with robots? Give any three reasons.
Answer:
No, we cannot completely replace humans with robots. Following are the reasons:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. Robots cannot handle unexpected situations.
  3. Humans cannot be replaced by robots in decision-making.

Question 15.
What is a quark?
Answer:

  1. A quark is a type of elementary particle and a fundamental constituent of matter.
  2. Quarks combine to form composite particles called hadrons, the most stable of which are protons and neutrons, the components of atomic nuclei.

Question 16.
How nano are found in mimic in laboratories from i) Morpho butterfly ii) Peacock feathers.
Answer:

  1. Morpho butterfly: Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles with which the materials are made.
  2. Peacock feathers: Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors.

Question 17.
From parrotfish, how nano are found in laboratories?
Answer:
The natural structure provides a blueprint for creating ultra-durable synthetic materials that could be useful for mechanical components in electronics and in other devices that undergo repetitive movement, abrasion, and contact stress.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 18.
How the lotus leaf surface (Nano in nature) found in laboratories?
Answer:

  1. Water repellant nano paints are made.
  2. Coating with such nano paints gives durability, protection against stains and dirt also enhances fuel efficiency when coated on ships.

Question 19.
What do you know about animate?
Answer:

  1. In 1954, George Devol invented the first digitally operated programmable robot called Unimate.
  2. George Devol and Joseph Engelberger, the father of the modern robotics industry formed the world’s first robot company in 1956.
  3. In 1961, Unimate was operated in a General Motors automobile factory for moving car parts around in New Jersey.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

XII. Five mark questions:

Question 1.
Write the advantage of Robotics.
Answer:

  1. Robots are much cheaper than humans.
  2. Robots never get tired like humans. It can work 24 x 7. Hence absenteeism in the workplace can be reduced.
  3. Robots are more precise and error-free in performing the task.
  4. Stronger and faster than humans.
  5. Robots can work in extreme environmental conditions: extreme hot (or) cold, space (or) underwater.
  6. In dangerous situations like bomb detection and bomb deactivation.
  7. In warfare, robots can save human lives.
  8. Robots are significantly used in handling materials in chemical industries especially in nuclear plants which can lead to health hazards in humans.

Question 2.
List out the disadvantage of Robotics.
Answer:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. They lack empathy and hence create an emotionless workplace.
  3. If ultimately robots would do all the work, and the humans will just sit and monitor them, health hazards will increase rapidly.
  4. The unemployment problem will increase.
  5. Robots can perform defined tasks and can’t handle unexpected situations
  6. The robots are well programmed to do a job and if a small thing goes wrong it ends up in a big loss to the company.
  7. If a robot malfunctions, it takes time to identify the problem, rectify it, and even program if necessary. This process requires significant time.
  8. Humans can’t be replaced by robots in decision-making.
  9. Till the robot reaches the level of human intelligence, the humans in the workplace will exit.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 3.
Give an example of “Nano” in nature.
Answer:

  1. A single strand of DNA the building block of all living things is about three nanometers wide.
  2. The scales on the wings of a morpho butterfly contain nanostructures that change the way light waves interact with each other, giving the wings brilliant metallic blue and green hues.
  3. Peacock feathers get their iridescent coloration from light interacting with 2-dimensional photonic crystal structures just tens of nanometers thick.
  4. Parrotfish crunches up coral all day. The source of the parrot fish’s powerful bite is the interwoven fiber nanostructure.
  5. Crystals of a mineral called fluorapatite are woven together in a chain mail-like arrangement. This structure gives parrotfish teeth incredible durability.
  6. Lotus leaf surface scanning electron micrograph (SEM) showing the nanostructures on the surface of a leaf from a lotus plant. This is the reason for the self-cleaning process in lotus leaf.

Question 4.
List out the applications of Nanotechnology in various fields.
Answer:

  1. Optical engineering and communication
  2. Electronics
  3. Metallurgy and materials
  4. Defense and security
  5. Energy storage
  6. Biomedical and drug delivery
  7. Agriculture and food
  8. Cosmetics and paints
  9. Biotechnology
  10. Textile

Question 5.
Explain about Nanorobots.
Answer:

  1. The size of the nanorobots is reduced to a microscopic level to perform a task in very small spaces.
  2. However, it is only in the developmental stage.
  3. The future prospects of it are much expected in the medical field:
    • Nano-robots in the bloodstream to perform small surgical procedures.
    • To fight against bacteria
    • Repairing individual cells in the body.
  4. It can travel into the body and once the job is performed it can find its way out.
  5. Chinese scientists have created the world’s first autonomous DNA robots to combat cancer tumours.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
List out the recent advancement in medical technology.
Answer:

  1. Virtual reality
  2. Precision medicine
  3. Health wearables
  4. Artificial organs
  5. 3D printing
  6. Wireless brain sensors
  7. Robotic surgery
  8. Smart inhalers

Question 7.
Discuss the applications of nanomaterial-based products in
i) Electronic Industry
ii) Medicine.
Answer:

Electronic industryMedicine
1. Data memory
2. Displays
3. Laser diodes
4. Glass fibers
5. Optical switches
6. Filters
7. Conductive, antistatic coatings
1. Drug delivery system
2. Active agents
3. Contrast medium
4. Medical rapid tests
5. Prostheses and implants
6. Antimicrobial agents and coatings
7. Agents in cancer therapy

Question 8.
Write about artificial intelligence briefly.
Answer:
The aim of artificial intelligence is to bring in human-like behaviour in robots. It works on

  1. Face recognition
  2. Providing a response to player’s actions in computer games
  3. Taking decisions based on previous actions
  4. To regulate the traffic by analyzing the density of traffic on roads.
  5. Translate words from one language to another

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 9.
What are the uses of industrial robots?
Answer:
Industrial robots are used for

  1. Welding
  2. Cutting
  3. Lifting
  4. Packing
  5. Transport
  6. Sorting
  7. Bending
  8. Assembling
  9. Manufacturing
  10. Weaponry
  11. Industrial goods
  12. Laboratory research
  13. Mass production of consumer
  14. Robotic water jet cutting
  15. Robotic laser cutting
  16. Handling hazardous materials like nuclear waste.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

11th Physics Guide Kinetic Theory of Gases Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
A particle of mass m is moving with speed u in a direction which makes 60° with respect to x-axis. It undergoes elastic collision with the wall. What is the change in momentum in x and y direction?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 1
(a) ∆px = – mu, ∆py = 0
(b) ∆px = – 2mu, ∆py = 0
(c) ∆px = 0, ∆py = mu
(d) ∆px = mu, ∆py = 0
Answer:
(a) ∆px = – mu, ∆py = 0

Hint: As it moves with respect to X axis
∆px = – mu
∆py = 0

Question 2.
A sample of ideal gas is at equilibrium. Which of the following quantity is zero?
(a) rms speed
(b) average speed
(c) average velocity
(d) most probable speed
Answer:
(c) average velocity

Hint:
vav = 1.6\(\sqrt{\frac{k \mathrm{~T}}{m}}\)
In equilibrium temperature T = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 3.
An ideal gas is maintained at constant pressure. If the temperature of an ideal gas increases from 100K to 1000K then the rms speed of the gas molecules:
(a) increases by 5 times
(b) increases by 10 times
(c) remains same
(d) increases by 7 times
Answer:
(b) increases by 10 times

Hint:
vrms = 1.73\(\sqrt{\frac{k \mathrm{~T}}{m}}\)
vrms ∝ ∆T
∆T is increased by 10 times.
∴ rms speed is increased by 10 times.

Question 4.
Two identically sized rooms A and B are connected by an open door. If the room A is air conditioned such that its temperature is 4° lesser than room B, which room has more air in it?
(a) Room A
(b) Room B .
(c) Both room has same air
(d) Cannot be determined
Answer:
(a) Room A

Hint:
As temperature of room A is less than that of room B evidently, Room A has more air in it.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 5.
The average translational kinetic energy of gas molecules depends on:
(a) number of moles and T
(b) only on T
(c) P and T
(d) P only
Answer:
(a) number of moles and T

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 1a

Question 6.
If the internal energy of an ideal gas U and volume V are doubled then the pressure:
(a) doubles
(b) remains same
(c) halves
(d) quadruples
Answer:
(b) remains same

Hint:
∆Q = ∆U + ∆W
∆U = ∆Q – ∆W

Question 7.
The ratio γ = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}}}\) for a gas mixture consisting of 8 g of helium and 16 g of oxygen is:
(a) 23/15
(b) 15/23
(c) 27/11
(d) 17/27
Answer:
(a) 23/15

Hint:
Number of moles of helium n = \(\frac { 8 }{ 4 }\) = 2
Number of moles of Oxygen n’ = \(\frac { 16 }{ 32 }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
For monoatomic helium gas f = 3
Cv = \(\frac { f }{ 2 }\)R = \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)R
For diatomic oxygen gas f = 5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 2

Question 8.
A container has one mole of monoatomic ideal gas. Each molecule has f degrees of freedom. What is the ratio of γ = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}}}\)?
(a) f
(b) \(\frac { f }{ 2 }\)
(c) \(\frac { f }{ f + 2 }\)
(d) \(\frac { f+2 }{ f }\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac { f+2 }{ f }\)

Question 9.
If the temperature and pressure of a gas is doubled the mean free’ path of the gas molecules:
(a) remains same
(b) doubled
(c) tripled
(d) quadrupled
Answer:
(a) remains same

Hint:
Mean free path is independent of temperature of pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 10.
Which of the following shows the correct relationship between the pressure and density of an ideal gas at constant temperature?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 3
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 4

Question 11.
A sample of gas consists of μ1 moles of monoatomic molecules, μ2 moles of diatomic molecules and μ3 moles of linear triatomic molecules. The gas is kept at high temperature. What is the total number of degrees of freedom?
(a) [3μ1 + 7(μ2 + μ3)] NA
(b) [3μ1 + 7μ2 + 6μ3] NA
(c) [7μ1 + 3(μ23)] NA
(d) [3μ1 + 6(μ2 + μ3)] NA
Answer:
(a) [3μ1 + 7(μ2 + μ3)] NA

Hint:
For monoatomic molecule no. of degrees freedom = 3
For diatomic molecule no. of degrees of freedom = 5
For triatomic molecule no. of degrees of freedom = 7
Total = [3μ1 + 7(μ2 + μ3) ]NA

Question 12.
If sp and sv denote the specific heats of nitrogen gas per unit mass at constant pressure and constant volume respectively, then: (JEE 2007)
(a) sp and sv = 28R
(b) sp and sv = R/28
(c) sp and sv = R/14
(d) sp and sv = R
Answer:
(b) sp and sv = R/28

Hint:
Cp – Cv = R
For diatomic gas N2 no. of degrees of freedom = 5
Sp – sv = R/28

Question 13.
Which of the following gases will have least rms speed at a given temperature?
(a) Hydrogen
(b) Nitrogen
(c) Oxygen
(d) Carbon dioxide
Answer:
(d) Carbon dioxide

Hint:
vrms = 1.73\(\sqrt{\frac{k \mathrm{~T}}{m}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 14.
For a given gas molecule at a fixed temperature, the area under the Maxwell- Boltzmann distribution curve is equal to:
(a) \(\frac { PV }{ kT }\)
(b) \(\frac { kT }{ PV }\)
(c) \(\frac { P }{ NkT }\)
(d) PV
Answer:
(a) \(\frac { PV }{ kT }\)

Hint:
The area under the graph will give total number of gas molecules in the system.
n = \(\frac { PV }{ RT }\) R = k
n = \(\frac { PV }{ kT }\)

Question 15.
The following graph represents the pressure versus number density for ideal gas at two different temperatures T1 and T2. The graph implies:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 5
(a) T1 = T2
(b) T1 > T2
(c) T1 < T2
(d) Cannot be determined
Answer:
(b) T1 > T2

II. Short Answer Questions:

Question 1.
What is the microscopic origin of pressure? kinetic energy and pressure?
Answer:
The microscopic origin of pressure was proposed by considering a thermodynamic system as a collection of molecules. By the kinetic theory of gases, the pressure is linked to the velocity of molecules (v) and number density (\(\frac {N}{ V }\))
p = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\)\(\frac { N }{ V }\)mv²
Where v – velocity of molecular
\(\frac { N }{ V }\) – number density

Question 2.
What is the microscopic origin of T is uniformly distributed to all degrees of temperature?
Answer:
The average K.E per molecule \(\overline{\mathrm{KE}}=\epsilon=\frac{3}{2} k \mathrm{T}\)
The equation implies that the temperature of a gas is a measure of the average translational K.E. per molecule of the gas.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 3.
Why moon has no atmosphere?
Answer:
The escape speed of gases on the surface of Moon is much less than the root mean square speeds of gases due to low gravity. Hence all molecules of the gases escape from the surface of the Moon easily.

Question 4.
Write the expression for rms speed, average speed and most probable speed of a gas molecule.
Answer:
(i) The root mean square speed (rms):
vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M}}\)

(ii) Average speed:
\(\overline{v}\) = 1.60\(\sqrt{\frac{k \mathrm{~T}}{m}}\)

(iii) Most probable speed:
vmp = 1.41\(\sqrt{\frac{k \mathrm{~T}}{m}}\)

Question 5.
What is the relation between the average kinetic energy and pressure?
Answer:
P = \(\frac {2}{ 3 }\)\(\overline{KE}\)

Question 6.
Define the term degrees of freedom.
Answer:
The minimum number of independent coordinates needed to specify the position and configuration of a thermo-dynamical system in space is called the degree of freedom of the system.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 7.
State the law of equipartition of energy.
Answer:
According to kinetic theory, the average kinetic energy of a system of molecules in thermal equilibrium at temperature T is uniformly distributed to all degrees of freedom (x or y or z directions of motion) so that each degree of freedom will get \(\frac {1}{ 2 }\) kT of energy. This is called law of equipartition of energy.

Question 8.
Define mean free path and write down its expression.
Answer:
Average distance travelled by the molecule between collisions is called mean free path (λ).
λ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d^{2}}\)

Question 9.
Deduce Charle’s law based on kinetic theory.
Answer:
PV = \(\frac {2}{ 3 }\)U
For a fixed pressure, the volume of the gas is proportional to internal energy of the gas.
(or)
Average kinetic energy is directly proportional to absolute temperature. It is implied that,
V ∝ T
(or) \(\frac {V}{ T }\) = constant.

Question 10.
Deduce Boyle’s law based on kinetic theory.
Answer:
We know that,
PV = \(\frac {2}{ 3 }\)U
But the internal energy of an ideal gas is equal to N times the average kinetic energy (∈) of each molecule.
U = N∈
For a fixed temperature, the average translational kinetic energy ∈ will remain constant. It implies that,
PV = \(\frac {2}{ 3 }\)N∈
Thus, PV = constant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 11.
Deduce Avogadro’s law based on kinetic theory.
Answer:
Avogadro’s law states that, at constant temperature and pressure, equal volumes of all gases contain the same number of molecules. For two different gases at the same temperature and pressure, according to kinetic theory of gases,
From equation,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 6
where \(\overline{v_{1}^{2}}\) and \(\overline{v_{2}^{2}}\) are the mean square speed for two gases and N1 and N2 are the number of gas molecules in two different gases.

At the same temperature, the average kinetic energy per molecule is the same for two gases.
\(\frac {1}{ 2 }\)m1\(\overline{v_{1}^{2}}\) = \(\frac {1}{ 2 }\)m2\(\overline{v_{2}^{2}}\) … (2)
Dividing the equation (1) by (2) we get, N1 = N2.
This is Avogadro’s law. It is sometimes referred to as Avogadro’s hypothesis or Avogadro’s Principle.

Question 12.
List the factors affecting the mean free path.
Answer:

  1. Mean free path increases with increasing temperature. As the temperature increases, the average speed of each molecule will increase.
  2. It is the reason why the smell of hot sizzling food reaches several metre away than smell of cold food.
  3. The mean free path increases with decreasing pressure of the gas and diameter of the gas molecules.

Question 13.
What is the reason for the Brownian motion?
Answer:
According to kinetic theory, any particle suspended in a liquid or gas is continuously bombarded from all directions so that the mean free path is almost negligible. This leads to the motion of the particles in a random and zig-zag manner.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Write down the postulates of the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:

  1. All the molecules of a gas are identical, elastic spheres.
  2. The molecules of different gases are different.
  3. The number of molecules in a gas is very large and the average separation between them is larger than size of the gas molecules.
  4. The molecules of a gas are in a state of continuous random motion.
  5. The molecules collide with one another and also with the walls of the container.
  6. These collisions are perfectly elastic so that there is no loss of kinetic energy during collisions.
  7. Between two successive collisions, a molecule moves with uniform velocity.
  8. The molecules do not exert any force of attraction or repulsion on each other except during collision.
  9. The molecules do not possess any potential energy and the energy is wholly kinetic.
  10. The collisions are instantaneous. The time spent by a molecule in each collision is very small compared to the time elapsed between two consecutive collisions.
  11. These molecules obey Newton’s laws of motion even though they move randomly.

Question 2.
Derive the expression of pressure exerted by the gas on the walls of the container.
Answer:
Let us consider a monoatomic gas of N molecules each having a mass m inside a cubical container of side l.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 7
The molecules collide with each other and also with the walls of the container. As the collisions are elastic in nature, there is no loss of energy, but a change in momentum occurs.

During each collision, the molecules impart certain momentum, to the wall. Because momentum, is transferred by molecules, the walls experience a continuous force. The force experienced per unit area of the walls of the container determines the pressure exerted by the gas.

Let us consider a molecule of mass m moving with a velocity v having components (vx, vy, vz) hits the right side wall. Since we have assumed that the collision is elastic, the particle rebounds with same speed and its x-component is reversed. The components of velocity of the molecule after collision are (-Vx, Vy, Vz).

The x-component of momentum of the molecule before collision = mvx.
The x-component of momentum of the molecule after collision = – mvx.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 9
According to law of conservation of linear momentum, the change in momentum of the wall = 2 mvx
The molecules within the distance of vx∆t from the right side wall and moving towards the right will hit the wall in the time interval ∆t.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 8
The number of molecules that will hit the right side wall in a time interval At is equal to the product of volume (Avx∆t) and number density of the molecules (n). Here A is area of the wall and n is number of molecules per unit volume (\(\frac { N }{ V }\)). It is assumed that the number density is the same throughout the cube.

Not all the n molecules will move to the right, hence on an average only half of then n molecules move to the right and the other half moves towards left side.
The number of molecules that hit the right side wall in a time interval.
∆t = \(\frac { n }{ 2 }\)Avx∆t … (2)
In the same interval of time ∆t, the total momentum transferred by the molecules,
∆p = \(\frac { n }{ 2 }\)Avx∆t x 2mvx
= Av²xmn∆t … (3)
From Newton’s second law, the change in momentum in a small interval of time gives rise to force.
The force exerted by the molecules on the wall is given by
F = \(\frac { ∆p }{ ∆t }\) = nmAv²x … (4)
Pressure, P = force the area of the wall,
P = \(\frac { F }{ A }\) = nmv²x… (5)
Since all the molecules are moving completely in random manner, they do not have same speed, so the term v²x can be replaced by the average \(\overline{v_{x}^{2}}\) in equation (5)
P = nm\(\overline{v_{x}^{2}}\) … (6)
Since the gas is assumed to move in a random direction, it has no preferred direction of motion. It is implied that the molecule has the same average speed in all three directions. So, \(\overline{v_{x}^{2}}\) = \(\overline{v_{y}^{2}}\) = \(\overline{v_{z}^{2}}\) The mean square speed is obtained from,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 10

Question 3.
Explain in detail the kinetic interpretation of temperature.
Answer:
We know that,
P = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) \(\frac { N }{ V }\) m\(\overline{v^{2}}\)
PV = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) Nm\(\overline{v^{2}}\) … (1)
Comparing the equation (1) with ideal gas equation PV = NkT,
NkT = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) Nm\(\overline{v^{2}}\)
KT = \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) m\(\overline{v^{2}}\) … (2)
Multiply the above equation by 3/2 on both sides,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)KT = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) m\(\overline{v^{2}}\) … (3)
R.H.S. of the equation (3) is called average kinetic energy of a single molecule (\(\overline{KE}\)).
The average kinetic energy per molecule
\(\overline{KE}\) = ∈ = \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)KT … (4)
It is implied from equation (3) that the temperature of a gas is a measure of the average translational kinetic energy per molecule of the gas.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 4.
Describe the total degrees of freedom for monoatomic molecule, diatomic molecule and triatomic molecule.
Answer:
Monoatomic molecule:
A monoatomic molecule has only three translational degrees of freedom by virtue of its nature.
∴ f = 3
Example: Helium, Neon, Argon.
Diatomic molecule: There are two cases.

(i) At Normal temperature: A molecule of a diatomic gas consists of two atoms bound to each other by a force of attraction, the center of mass lies in the center of the diatomic molecule. So, the motion of the center of mass requires three translational degrees of freedom.
In addition, the diatomic molecule can be rotated about three mutually perpendicular axes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 11
In addition, the diatomic molecule can be rotated about three mutually perpendicular axes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 12
But the moment of inertia about its own axis of rotation is negligible. Hence, it has only two rotational degrees of freedom. So totally there are five degrees of freedom.
f = 5

(ii) At high temperature: At a very high temperature such as 5000 K, the diatomic molecules possess additional two degrees of freedom due to vibrational motion [one due to kinetic energy of vibration and the other is due to potential energy].
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 13
So totally there are seven degree of freedom.
f = 7
Example: Hydrogen, Nitrogen, Oxygen.

(i) Linear triatomic molecule:
The linear triatomic molecule has three translational degrees of freedom. It has two rotational degrees of freedom because it is similar to a diatomic molecule except there is an additional atom at the center.

At normal temperature, linear triatomic molecules will have five degrees of freedom. It has two additional vibrational degrees of freedom at high temperatures.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 14
So a linear triatomic molecule has seven degrees of freedom.
Example: Carbon dioxide.

(ii) Non-linear triatomic molecule: It has three translational degrees of freedom and three rotational degrees of freedom about three mutually orthogonal axes. So, the total degrees of freedom.
f = 6
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 15
Example: Water, Sulphur dioxide.

Question 5.
Derive the ratio of two specific heat capacities of monoatomic, diatomic, and triatomic molecules.
Answer:
Monoatomic molecule: Average kinetic energy of a molecule
= [\(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)kT]
(i) Total energy of a mole of gas
= \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)

(ii) For one mole, the molar specific heat at constant volume
CV = \(\frac { dU }{ dT }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dT }\)[\(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)RT]
CV = [latex]\frac { 3 }{ 2 }[/latex]R
Cp = CV + R = \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)R + R
= \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\) R

(iii) The ratio of specific heats,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 15
Diatomic molecule: Average kinetic energy of a diatomic molecule at low temperature \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\)

(i) Total energy of one mole of gas
= \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\)kT x NA = \(\frac { 5 }{ 2 }\)RT
(Here, the total energy is purely kinetic)

(ii) For one mole specific heat at constant volume
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 16

(iii) Energy of a diatomic molecule at high temperature is equal to \(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\) RT.
CV = \(\frac { dU }{ dT }\) = [ \(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\)RT] = [\(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\) R
∴CP = CV + R = \(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\) R + R
CP = \(\frac { 9 }{ 2 }\)R
It is noted that the CV and CP are higher for diatomic molecules than the monoatomic molecules. It is implied that to increase the temperature of diatomic gas molecules by 1 °C it require more heat energy than monoatomic molecules.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 17

Triatomic molecule:
(i) Linear molecule: Energy of one mole
= \(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\)KT x NA = \(\frac { 7 }{ 2 }\)RT
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 18

(ii) Non-Linear molecule: Energy of one mole
= \(\frac { 6 }{ 2 }\)KT x NA = \(\frac { 6 }{ 2 }\)RT
CV = \(\frac { dU }{ dT }\) = 3R
CP = CV + R
= 3R + R = 4R
∴ γ = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{V}}}\) = \(\frac { 4R }{ 3R }\)
= \(\frac { 4 }{ 3 }\)
= 1.33

Question 6.
Explain in detail the Maxwell Boltzmann distribution function.
Answer:
(i) All molecules in any gas move with different velocities in random directions.

(ii) Each molecule collides with every other molecule and their speed is exchanged.

(iii) Let us calculate the rms speed of each molecule and not the speed of each molecule which is rather difficult.

(iv) In general our interest is to find how many gas molecules have the range of speed from v to v + dv.

(v) This is given by Maxwell’s speed distribution function.
Nv = 4πN(\(\frac { m }{ 2πkT }\))3/2 v² \(e^{-m v^{2} / 2 k T}\)
The above expression is graphically shown as follows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 19

(vi) For a given temperature the number of molecules having lower speed increases parabolically but decreases exponentially after reaching most probable speed. The rms speed, average speed, and most probable speed are indicated in the Figure.

(vii) It is found that the rms speed is greatest among the three.

(viii) The area under the graph will give the total number of gas molecules in the system.

(ix) From the speed distribution graph for two different temperatures, it is found that, as temperature increases, the peak of the curve is shifted to the right.

(x) It is implied that the average speed of each molecule will increase. But the area under each graph is the same. Since it represents the total number of gas molecules.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 7.
Derive the expression for mean free path of the gas.
Answer:
Let us consider a system of molecules each with diameter d. Let n be the number of molecules per unit volume. It is assumed that only one molecule is in motion and all others are at rest as shown in the figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 21
If a molecule moves with average speed v in a time t, the distance travelled is vt. In this time t, let us consider the molecule to move in an imaginary cylinder of volume itd2vt. It collides with any molecule whose center is within this cylinder. Hence, the number of collisions is equal to the number of molecules in the volume of the imaginary cylinder. It is equal to πd²vt. The total path length divided by the number of collisions in time t is the mean free path.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 22
It is assumed that only one molecule is moving at a time and other molecules are at rest. But in actual practice all the molecules are in random motion. Hence the average relative speed of one molecule with respect to other molecules has to be taken into account. After some detailed calculations the correct expression for mean free path,
λ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} n \pi d^{2}}\)
It is implied from the equation that the mean free path is inversely proportional to number density. When the number density increases the molecular collisions increases. Hence it decreases the distance travelled by the molecule before collisions.

Rearranging the equation (2) using ‘m’ (mass of the molecule)
∴ λ = \(\frac{m}{\sqrt{2} \pi d^{2} m n}\)
But mn – mass per unit volume = ρ (density of the gas)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 23

Question 8.
Describe the Brownian motion.
Answer:
The random (Zig – Zag path) motion of pollen suspended in a liquid is called Brownian motion. Brownian motion is due to the bombardment of suspended particles by molecules of the surrounding fluid. Einstein gave the systematic theory of Brownian motion based on kinetic theory and he deduced the average size of molecules.

According to kinetic theory, any particle suspended in a liquid or gas is continuously bombarded from all directions in such a way that the mean free path is almost negligible. This leads to the motion of the particles in a random and zig-zag manner.

Factors affecting Brownian Motion:

  • Brownian motion increases with increasing temperature.
  • It decreases with bigger particle size, high viscosity, and density of the liquid (or) gas.

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Fresh air is composed of nitrogen N2 (78%) and oxygen O2 (21%). Find the rms speed of N2 and O2 at 20°C.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 24

Question 2.
If the rms speed of methane gas in Jupiter’s atmosphere is 471.8 ms-1, shows that the surface temperature of Jupiter is sub-zero.
Answer:
Let the temperature of Jupiter be T.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 25
The temperature of Jupiter is = -130°C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 3.
Calculate the temperature at which the rms velocity of a gas triples its value at S.T.P.
Answer:
Let, T = T1 = 273K
RMS velocity,
C = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{RT}_{1}}{\mathrm{M}}}\) … (1)
When the RMS velocity is tripled,
3C = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{RT}_{2}}{\mathrm{M}}}\) … (2)
Dividing equation (2) by (1) we get
\(\frac { 3C }{ C }\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{RT}_{2} / \mathrm{M}}{3 \mathrm{R} \times 273 / \mathrm{M}}}\)
3 = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}_{2}}{273}}\)
Squaring on both side
9 = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{2}}{273}\)
∴ T2 = 273 x 9 = 2457K
Temperature T2 = 2457K

Question 4.
A gas is at temperature 80°C and pressure 5 x 10-10 Nm-2. What is the number of molecules per m³ if Boltzmann’s constant is 1.38 x 10-23 J k-1.
Answer:
Temperature T = 80 + 273 = 353K
Pressure P = 5 x 10-10N/m²
KB = \(\frac { R }{ N }\) ∴ R = KBN
P = nRT = nKBNT
Number of molecules,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 26
Number of molecules = 1.02 x 1011

Question 5.
From kinetic theory of gases, show that Moon cannot have an atmosphere (Assume k = 1.38 x 1023 J K-1, T = 0° C = 273K).
Answer:
We know that \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) mV²rms = \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\) kT
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 27
Vrms = 1.842 x 10³ ms-1
The value of ve is less than the velocity of gas present on the moon. Hence moon cannot have an atmosphere.

Question 6.
If 1020 oxygen molecules per second strike 4 cm² of the wall at an angle of 30° with the normal when moving at a speed of 2 x 10³ ms-1, find the pressure exerted on the wall, (mass of 1 atom =1.67 x 10-27 kg).
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 28
Velocity = 2 x 10³ms-1
P = 26.72 x 10-7 x 8 x 2 x 10³
= 427.5 x 10-4 kg ms-1
Component of momentum normal to wall,
PC = P cosθ
Angle θ = 30°
PC = 427.5 x 10-4 cos30°
= 427.5 x 10-4 x \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
= 370.2 x 10-4 kg ms-1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 29

Question 7.
During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a mixture of monoatomic and diatomic gases is found to be proportional to the cube of the temperature. Find the value of γ = (CP/CV).
Answer:
Meyer’s relation is,
CP – CV = R
∴ CP = CV + R
γ = \(\frac{C_{P}}{C_{V}}\)
= \(\frac{C_{V}+R}{C_{V}}\)
γ = 1 + \(\frac{R}{C_{V}}\)
∴ CV = \(\frac { R }{ r-1 }\)
For monoatomic gas, R
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 30

Question 8.
Calculate the mean free path of air molecules at STP. The diameter of N2 and O2 is about 3 x 10-10m.
Answer:
One moles of an ideal gas at S.T.P occupies a volume of 22.4 x 10-3m³.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 31
In terms of number of molecules and radius the mean free path at S.T.P can be written as,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 32

Question 9.
A gas made of a mixture of 2 moles of oxygen and 4 moles of argon at temperature T. Calculates the energy of the gas in terms of RT. Neglect the vibrational modes.
Answer:
Since oxygen is a diatomic molecule with 5 degrees of freedom,
Degree of freedom of molecules in 2 moles of oxygen = f1 = 2N x 5 = 10 N.
Since argon is a monoatomic molecule, degrees of freedom of molecules in 4 moles of argon f2 = 4N x 3 = 12 N.
∴ Total degrees of freedom of the mixture = f = f1 + f2
= 10 N+ 12N
= 22N.
According to the principle of law of equation partition energy, associated with each degree of freedom of a molecule = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)kT.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases 33

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Kinetic Theory of Gases

Question 10.
Estimate the total number of air molecules in a room of capacity 25 m3 at a temperature of 27°C.
Answer:
Boltzmann’s constant KB = 1.38 x 10-23Jk-1
KB = \(\frac { R }{ N }\)
∴ R = KBN
Now P= nRT = nKBNT
∴The number of molecules in the room PV
= nN = \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{TK}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
Temperature = 27 + 273 = 300K
= \(\frac{1.013 \times 10^{5} \times 25}{300 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23}}\)
= 6.117 x 1026 molecules
= 6.1 x 1026 molecules